Home

Canon PIXMA MP272 User Guide Manual

1. Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 224 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Default Setting Print from Last Page The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the number of copies to be printed For Copies on the Page Setup tab specify the number of copies to be printed m T te w n ang el payee oma BR sek E Man P Page Setup of Elects Al Martenance El Page Sze CO ae amp Orientation a O Porra A Langsecape Rotate 180 degrees a P Sane os Page Sre v Page Layout Nomalsize Nomalsize Bordeless Fat Page Scaled Page Layout E Duplex Parting Stacie Sde Lengad taping et Spectr Magn Part Options Stamp Backuground _Detauts 0K Cancel toy Hee 3 Specify the print order Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order When you do this you do not need to sort pages into their correct order after printing 4 Set up collated printing when you specify multiple copies in the Copies box Check the Collate check box when y
2. Budsedt l g P important Index print will be disabled if you select any of the following paper sizes Credit Card You can print up to 80 images on one page Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example Index x20 1 2 3 44 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click ot Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Index Page 189 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 190 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Easy PhotoPrint EX Se Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print You can print a variety of ID photos P important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use For details contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo To print ID photos select 4 x6 10x1
3. 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page album Page number EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the Cover Options dialog box To display the Cover Options dialog box select Front or Front amp Back for Cover and click Options Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout consisting of two page master In a double page album you can arrange an image across the left and right pages You can customize the page numbers position font size etc in the Page Number Settings dialog box To display the Page Number Settings dialog box select the Page number checkbox and click Settings You can customize the margins of the front cover inside pages and back cover in the Margin Settings dialog box To display the Margin Settings dialog box click Margins 3 Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 120 of 678 pages 4 If you want to change the layout click Layout The Change Layout dialog box appears In the Change Layout dialog box you can change the layout or select whether to print the date on which the picture was taken on the photo ES Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Siz
4. Dialog box that opens when Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages is clicked in the Create Edit PDF file window 7 WW Save the image to the speotied folder as a PDF file Ta cia Hoag ET T Bowe Berane IMG 0001 NEW Save as type PDFiMutipie Pages zj cn Set acs E Password secusty settings E Save to a Subfolder wth Curert Date Ce co e Save as type Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 392 of 678 pages e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file Note PDF Multiple Pages is displayed when multiple images are selected e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well If a password protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Set Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security Settin
5. Replacing a FINE Cartridge Basic Guide Page 66 of 678 pages Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing a FINE Cartridge Replacing a FINE Cartridge When ink runs out while printing is in progress the error code E 1 6 will appear on the LED The Alarm lamp will light up and the Ink lamp will start flashing Make sure which FINE Cartridge has run out of ink and replace it with a new one E8 Note For information on the compatible FINE Cartridges refer to the printed manual Getting Started m Replacing Procedure When FINE Cartridges run out of ink follow the procedure below to replace them gt Important Handling FINE Cartridges Do not touch the electrical contacts A or print head nozzles B on the FINE Cartridge The machine may not print properly if you touch it To maintain optimal print quality we recommend the use of specified Canon brand FINE Cartridges Refilling the ink is not recommended If you remove a FINE Cartridge replace it immediately Do not leave the machine with FINE Cartridges removed Use new FINE Cartridges for replacement Installing used FINE Cartridges may cause the nozzles to clog Furthermore with such cartridges the machine will not be able to inform you when to replace the cartridges properly Once a FINE Cartridge has been installed do not remove it from the machine and leave it out in the open This will cause the FINE Cartridge to dry out and the ma
6. l Swap Left amp Right Swaps the left and right halves P important This function is not available while the image is enlarged reduced e Rotate 180 Rotate 180 Rotates right half of the image 180 degrees P important This function is not available while the image is enlarged reduced A Enlarge Enlarges the displayed image g Reduce Reduces the displayed image aa Full screen Enlarges reduces the image to display it full screen ES Note Enlarge Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image 1 When the document is scanned upside down the image displayed in the Stitch assist window will also be upside down Click Rotate 180 to rotate the image to the correct orientation You can drag the right half of the image from right to left or up and down to adjust the position If the left and right halves do not match due to a slanted document place the document correctly and click Back then scan again 11 Click Next 12 Drag the mouse to specify the area to be saved then click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist o Generates the nage of the cxopping west The combined image appears in the Thumbnail window When scanning is completed the Scan Complete dialog box opens Select Scan or Exit Select Scan to scan the next document or select Exit to end O Cance MP Navigator
7. Hi 0 20 in 5 0 mm a 1 28 in 32 5 mm i ie 0 13 in 3 4mm 0 13 in 3 4mm HB Recommended printing area E Printable area Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Letter Legal Page 650 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Letter Legal Letter Legal Size Printable Area width x height Letter 8 00 x 10 69 inches 203 2 x 271 4 mm Legal 8 00 x 13 69 inches 203 2 x 347 6 mm This page size can be used only when printing from your computer 4 0 12 in 3 0 mm 1 23 in 31 2 mm 1 28 in 32 5 mm 0 20 in 5 0 mm ot tf ot st af 0 25 in 6 4mm 0 25 in 6 3 mm HB Recommended printing area E printable area Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Envelopes Page 651 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Envelopes Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area width x height European DL 4 06 x 7 07 inches 103 2 x 179 5 mm US Comm Env 10 3 86 x 7 91 inches 98 0 x 200 8 mm This page size can be used only when printing from your computer 0 32 in 8 0 mm J q y 1 28 in 32 5 mm lt a peat Gaar 0 13 in 3 4mm 0 13 in 3 4 mm HB Recommended printing area Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top How to Detach Attach the Document Cover Page 652 of 678 pages Advanced Gui
8. Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files E8 Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 167 of 678 pages Adjusting Images Page 168 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Adjusting Images Easy PhotoPrint EX Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness contrast etc of images 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears Te AR RedEye Conection DBP _Faxeshapenes QO vicratFace Smoathing EA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image
9. Creating Custom Categories 1 In the View amp Use window sort images by category and click Edit Custom Categories The Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens Edt Custom Categories es You can add delete custom categories ete Lin CEK Cancel 2 Click Add to List The Add Category dialog box opens Add Category 3 Enter Category name and click OK E9 Note You can create up to 20 custom categories Up to 50 single byte characters can be used for a category name Double click a created category to open the Change Category Name dialog box in which you can change the category name Select a custom category and click Delete to delete it Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Classifying Images into Categories Page 353 of 678 pages Related Topic View amp Use Window Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Page 354 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images e Saving scanned images to computer s gt Saving e Saving scanned image as PDF Files Saving as PDF Files See the corresponding sections below for details
10. P important Large documents such as A4 size photos Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Placing Documents Page 312 of 678 pages that cannot be placed away from the edges arrow alignment mark of the Platen may be saved as PDF files To save in a format other than PDF scan by specifying the file format Placing Multiple Documents Allow 3 8 inches 1 cm or more space between the edges of the Platen and documents and between documents Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned more than 1 cm more than 1 cm more than 1 cm more than 1 cm E8 Note You can place up to 12 documents Positions of slanted documents 10 degrees or less are corrected automatically Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 313 of 678 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine s gt Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine sb Appendix Various Scan Settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 314 of 678 pages Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Saving Scanned Data to
11. When the checkbox is selected you can scan up to 99 pages at one time Deselect the checkbox to display each conversion result text in a separate file When the checkbox is not selected you can scan up to 10 pages at one time Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Button Settings Tab Save Page 446 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scanner Button Settings Tab Save MP Navigator EX Scanner Button Settings Tab Save On the Scanner Button Settings tab you can specify the following settings You can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine aad EN Scanner Button Semings gt Select an event to specty the action Event Select Evert Seveto PC a Document Tyge Ato Sean gt Actions Scan Settings A agpo Sawe Senge Atomstcally seve the rag to your computer ser scanning Fie Nene ING Save as ype Ato w Saven Crer UserName Pictures MP Novigo Browse F Sawe to a Subfoider wth Qurert Date D Qpen the save ddog box after scanning the mage Cora Event e Select Event Save to PC is set e Document Type Auto Scan is set The document type is automatically detected P important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Scan In that case specify the document type o
12. e Face Sharpener Corrects the entire image to sharpen the face You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Blemish Remover Removes moles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to e OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area e Undo Cancels the latest correction e Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image e Save Selected Image Saves the corrected images selected e Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list e Exit Closes the Correct Enhance Images window Toolbar e Toolbar E Rotate Left Rotates the image 90 degrees counter clockwise e a Rotate Right Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 412 of 678 pages AD Invert Inverts the image horizontally H Trimming Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest In the displayed window drag the white frame to specify the trimming area Move the cursor inside the white frame and drag to move the trimming area Note
13. gt Trademarks Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Operating the Contents Pane Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Contents Pane lE Can series On screen Manua 4 bak p al Contents yx My Manual 2 Search E Print gt Advanced iGuide ASvanced Guide gt Pre no from a Computer gt Printing win Oher Application Sofware gt Overview of De Printer Orwer gt Canon U Prater Driver Canon N Printer Driver The Canon U printer driver is software that ts installed on your computer for printing data on this machine The Canon U printer Giver converts the print data created dy your Windows application into data that your printer Can understand and sends the converted data to the printer Because fierent mocets support Afferent print data formats you need a Canon U printer driver for the Specific model you are using How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the diver setting Hems through the printing preferences screen of the Canon U preter driver gt Toview all descriptions of a tab C ck the Help button on each tad A dalog Dor opens splaysing a description of each Hem on the tad You can atso dick the link found in the Gescription of an Rem to display a description of the linked Balog Dox To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to leam about and then
14. Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt General Tab MP Navigator EX General Tab On the General tab you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings Save in My Bax C Users UserName Pictures MP Navigator EX Location of Tonporiry Files C Users Userttsre Pictures MP Navigator EX Bpptcaton to nun Pert Photo Easy PhotoPre EX Poet Album Esay PhatoPart EX Conven to ted fe Netepod seach to Eest None tach Manusi Open POF file XXX e Product Name Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use If the displayed product is not the one you want to use select the desired product from the list e Save in My Box Displays the folder in which to save scanned documents To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Location of Temporary Files Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily To change the folder click Browse to specify another one P important An error may occur if you set the destination to the root directory of the drive on which the operating system is installed Be sure to specify a folder An error may occu
15. Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 547 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Aligning the Print Head gt Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory adjust the print head position EA Note If the remaining ink level is low the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low s gt Routine Maintenance 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the print head alignment sheet 1 Press the Maintenance button repeatedly until u lowercase u appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The print head alignment sheet will be printed BADOO ANI KAINAN alll LIL TT HNLIUUAN HULL HLTH HUTT ij l P important a Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet a Do not dirty the print head alignment sheet If the sheet is stained or wrinkled the pattern may not be scanned correctly 5 Scan the sheet to adjust the print head position Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 548 of 678 pages 1 Place the print head alignment
16. E8 Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page 388 of 678 pages The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text OCR 300 dpi 400 dpi e Descreen Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo Black and White Photo or Text OCR Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen e Reduce Show through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo Black and White Photo or Text OCR Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show through is apparent in the scanned image e Unsharp Mask Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Text OCR e Remove gutter shadow Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size
17. Easy PhotoPrint EX Questions and Answers How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File m Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from gt How Do Print with Even Margins s What Is C1 or C4 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File Page 177 of 678 pages AJni Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Easy PhotoPrint EX es Se 3 How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File If you want to move or copy a file created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another you need to move or copy the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well For example when you save a file named MyAlbum el1 a folder named MyAlbum el1 Data is automatically created in the same folder that contains the MyAlbum el1 file If you want to move or copy the MyAlbum el1 file to another folder move or copy the MyAlbum el1 Data folder as well The MyAlbum el1 Data folder contains the photos used in the album MyAlbum ell S Data MyAlbum ell E8 Note The icons may vary depending on the items P important Do not change the Data folder name otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited with Easy PhotoPrint EX Page top Downloaded from
18. 2 Click OK when the confirmation message appears E8 Note When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed click OK to restart your computer On screen manuals other than printer driver s help and scanner driver s help are uninstalled at a time 1 Select Applications on the Go menu 2 Double click the Canon Utilities folder and then the IJ Manual folder 3 Drag the folder of your machine s name into the trash 4 Drag the g Canon XXX On screen Manual icon where XXX is your machine s name on your desktop into the trash Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Transporting the Machine Page 662 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Transporting the Machine Transporting the Machine When relocating the machine pack the machine using the original packing materials If you do not have the original packing materials pack the machine carefully using protective material and place it inside a sturdy box P important Do not transport or store the machine slanted vertically or upside down as the ink may leak and damage the machine 1 Turn the machine off 2 Confirm that the Power lamp is off and unplug the machine P important Do not unplug the machine while the Power lamp is lit or flashing green as it may cause malfunction or damage to the machine making the machine unable to print 3 Retract the Paper Support then close the Paper Ou
19. Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Adjusting Images MP Navigator EX Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness contrast etc of images 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust EA Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Edit Convert then click Fix photo images on the list Chick to select the image it Pormes 2 Bd H GP ai comin A G aja es Coro Al Specie Categone Edt Custom Cotegores wre J err pep A E O My Bee Q Ore sl G OD Categories B Lps acy v Oey leaped Q Othe j Er gt ror Print Dos D Send vo Document lager P Edi Canvent b BareiCed Imsgerd Corpetst to text He Jumo to Man Meru C Uvert Urerblame Dictores MP Navigator EX 2000 01 O8 001 jeg The Correct Enhance Images window opens EA Note The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box In that case only the target image outlined in orange can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the
20. Allows you to adjust the image s overall color You can correct colors that have faded due to colorcast etc and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes s gt Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Perform Scan e Scan Scanning starts E Note When scanning starts the progress will be displayed Click Cancel to cancel the scan Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan preview settings Preferences Dialog Box e Close Closes ScanGear scanner driver Toolbar e Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view In thumbnail view A R MAD Be i ala OD o O In whole image view aa gt Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 490 of 678 pages Basic Mode Tab Ea Thumbnail a Whole image view Switches the view in the Preview area gt Preview Area 2a Rotate Left Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again 2 Za Rotate Right Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again y al Auto Crop Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area
21. C Users WUserhtame Pictures MP Navigator EX 2009_01_01 Browse Fle came IMG Seve as type JPEG Ext Mi St F Sawe to a Subfolder wth Curent Date gee Cane P important You cannot select JPEG Exif when Document Type is Text OCR Note By default the following folders are specified as the destination folders Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Page 356 of 678 pages 3 Click Save Scanned images are saved according to the settings To further use edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box s gt Creating Editing PDF Files gt Printing Documents s Printing Photos s gt Sending via E mail Editing Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving as PDF Files Page 357 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Saving as PDF Files Saving as PDF Files Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files 1 Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save then click Save as PDF file Ck bo males ho inga 12 Pretewrnces _ BH SRM Ben si a vee E154 6 ae set Eluwaved 2 Demeved 2 umav
22. CET About iek upss A Check if any symbol appears on the screen The ink with 9 Ink low is running low You can continue printing for a while but we recommend you to have a new FINE Cartridge available Ee Note An error message may appear while printing Confirm the message and take an appropriate action Follow the procedure below to open each of the confirmation screens tiie 1 Open the printer driver setup window from Control Panel Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Click View Printer Status on the Maintenance sheet To confirm the FINE Cartridge information click the Ink Details menu ES Note You can also display the printer status monitor by clicking Canon XXX Printer where XXX is your machine s name which appears on the taskbar while printing acintosh 1 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Select Ink Level Information in the pop up menu To confirm the FINE Cartridge information click Ink Details 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 71 of 678 pages Cleaning the Machine Page 72 of 678 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine Cleaning the Machine This section describes how to clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller s Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Cleaning the Protrusions insid
23. Colors Are Uneven AAAA AAAA Colors Are Streaked e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace the FINE Cartridge e Check 3 Perform Print Head Alignment Aligning the Print Head Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 598 of 678 pages EE Note Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position Page top Downloaded from ManualsPr
24. Enter the menu name displayed on the operation panel of this machine or on the computer for example frame erase copy To find an explanation of the operation for a specific purpose Enter function item to be printed for example print calendar 3 Click Start Searching Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 99 of 678 pages The search is started and the titles of documents containing the keyword are displayed in the search results list When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords the search results are displayed as shown below Documents Containing Perfect Match Documents containing the entire search character string including spaces exactly as entered perfect match Documents Containing All Keywords Documents containing all keywords that were entered Documents Containing Any Keyword Documents containing at least one of the keywords that were entered 4 Display the document that you want to read From the search results list double click or select and press Enter the title of the document you want to read When the documents of that title are displayed the keywords found on those documents are highlighted Note If you modify the keyword entry and perform multiple searches a search history remains To delete the search history click located to the right of Keyword and select Clear History which is displayed Page top Downloaded fr
25. F Restate 180 degrees x Portes P Same os Page Sire Page Layout Nomssire maram a E a 2 8 qme LCE a Pisce stamp over text Rap frst page only E Background Sargie 1 Background frn page only on corel _ Dotnata tp 3 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering a Stamp Stamp Settings Not Saved EAZ Saro Piacemert Save setings Rare Type Tet xi Qarp Tee TrueType Fort re Sty Regdar xj Sae 3 Oygine Color RGB 192 152 192 Select Color 4 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window e Stamp tab Select Text Bitmap or Date Time User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type e For Text registration the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text If necessary change the TrueType Font Style Size and Outline settings You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color e For Bitmap click Select File and select the bitmap file bmp to be used If necessary change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area e For Date Time User Name the creation date time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text If necessary change the settings of TrueType Font Style Size and Outline You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color P important Stamp Text appears grayed
26. Faw Cason Crapcale Prarg P C Fe trenen Carei CD ES Note For details on the printer driver functions click Question on the Quality amp Media Color Options Special Effects Borderless Printing or Margin screen To display the preview to confirm the print result click Preview Some software applications may not have a preview function T Start printing Click Print to start printing EA Note Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Stop Jobs f printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Other Usages Page 37 of 678 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Other Usages Other Usages This section introduces the function to print photos from your PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera connected with a USB cable MP270 series only This section also introduces useful software applications you can use with the machine Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Useful Software Applications Solution Menu My Printer Easy WebPrint EX amp Page top Downloaded from Manua
27. Mi quiet Mode Siloa Plier Where Tempierery Fllesare Sei CiWsers bisertlarre AOD Tero Browse Sound Settings Elas Music During Scanning Seda CSSA EPa Sound When Scanning is Compieted Calixaten Settings Eweoute at Every Scan OFF X Scanner Tab Allows you to specify a folder to save images temporarily and a music file to play during or at the end of a scan Scanner Tab Preview Tab Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear scanner driver is started and how to display cropping frames after previewing images You can also select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents Preview Tab Scan Tab Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear scanner driver after scanning images gt Scan Tab Color Settings Tab Allows you to select how to adjust color and specify the monitor gamma value s gt Color Settings Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Tab Page 515 of 678 pages Anad Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Scanner Tab Scanner Tab On the Scanner tab you can specify the following settings e Scanner Preview Scan Color Settings Mi quiet Hode Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved Cipra sertan AOD Teo Seose Sound Settings Po Play Music During Scanning aona Meda CSSAMP INID Ptay
28. Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Before Installing the MP Drivers Page 658 of 678 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Before Installing the MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers You should also refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed Checking the Machine Status e Properly connect the personal computer and the machine For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started e Turn off the machine Checking the Personal Computer Settings e Terminate all running applications e In Windows Vista log on as a user who has the administrator rights In Windows XP log on as the computer administrator In Windows 2000 log on as a member of the Administrators group EB Note When an old version of the MP Drivers is already installed first delete uninstall that version For instructions on deleting the MP Drivers see Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Related Topics Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Installing the MP Drivers Page 659 of 678 pages Nelieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Y
29. Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navig Page 317 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Appendix Various Scan Settings gt Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX enables you to specify the response resulting from pressing a button for scanning on the Operation Panel of the machine You can specify the response individually for each event 1 Start MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX 2 Click Preferences Scan Import Documents or Images amp S Photos Documents Platen E Show this window of statu The Preferences dialog box opens E9 Note The Preferences dialog box can also be opened by clicking Preferences in the One click Mode screen 3 On the Scanner Button Settings tab specify Actions Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navig Page 318 of 678 pages a le Save Settings Asomsticaly save the rag te your computer ser scamming 8 Fie Name ING Save as type A
30. The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case adjust the cropping frames scan areas in whole image view and scan Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly Documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes EA Note See Scanning in Auto Scan Mode to scan easily by automatically detecting the document type You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab Use the Advanced Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode output resolution image brightness and color tone See the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab Basic Mode Tab m Advanced Mode Tab 1 Place the document on the Platen then start ScanGear scanner driver Placing Documents Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 2 Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 466 of 678 pages W Clatter shadow correcton Color Patien 3 Click Preview Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area Images are
31. gt Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile s gt Setting the Ink Cartridge Managing the Machine Power gt Reducing the Machine Noise s gt Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing the Print Options Page 561 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Print Options Changing the Print Options You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off The procedure for changing the print options is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Print Options on the Page Setup tab i Canca MP270 series Printer Printing Preferences 1x Qik E Man 3B Poze Setup gf Btects Af Martenance El Pope Sze Lotier 85x117 x Orientation a 5 Pora A Langecape Rotate 180 degrees Oe ter Pape Sane as Page Size Page Layout Noenalsine Pee 2 os es Ee Pagg Options ook cares oes ates The Print Options dialog box opens F Disable CM required trees the appicaton software E Disable the color profile setting of the apphcation software Una of Print Data Processing
32. Basic Guide E E Contents gt Overview of the Machine Overview of the Machine This section shows the component names of the machine and describes the basic operations you need to know before using it Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View Operation Panel LED Display and Basic Operations amp Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Main Components Page 4 of 678 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Overview of the Machine gt Main Components Main Components mb Front View Rear View gt Inside View gt Operation Panel m Front View 1 Document Cover Open to load an original on the Platen Glass 2 Paper Support Raise and tip back to load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Rear Tray Load various sizes or types of paper which you can use on the machine Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same time and fed automatically one sheet at a time See Loading Paper 4 Paper Guides Slide to align with both sides of the paper stack 5 Operation Panel Use to change the settings of the machine or to operate it See Operation Panel E8 Note The LED and lamps on the Operation Panel other than the Power lamp will go out if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes To restore them press any button except the ON button or perform the print operation 6 Paper Output Tray Opens automatically when printing or copying st
33. Be sure to close the ScanGear scanner driver window before closing the application Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high resolutions For example at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600 dpi in full color ScanGear scanner driver and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning Calibration may take time if the machine is connected via USB 1 1 Applications with Restrictions on Use If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 you may not be able to scan using the Operation Panel of the machine In that case restart the computer You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows Vista and Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 Scan with other applications such as MP Navigator EX In some applications you may encounter a problem when you switch to thumbnail view in the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver In that case scan each document individually Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Notes Scanner Driver Page 646 of 678 pages changing Paper Size according to the document e In some applications if you select the View scanned images checkbox in the Auto Scan Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver the window displaying the thumbnails of the scanned images may close automatically e Some applications
34. Cleaning Inside the Machine Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows Open the printer driver setup window Bottom Plate Cleaning N Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens 9 Load paper in the machine As instructed in the dialog box fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally and then unfold the sheet Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down Perform the bottom plate cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and click Execute Bottom plate cleaning starts Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing the Machine Settings Page 559 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page 560 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer
35. ES Note You can switch the size of paper loaded on the Rear Tray between A4 and Letter Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter o Press the Fit to Page button The Fit to Page lamp lights up To cancel Fit to Page copying press the Fit to Page button again E8 Note You can use the Fit to Page button only when you are using the copy function Copied images are automatically reduced or enlarged in the lengthwise widthwise direction to fit the page size you select gt Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies ES Note By pressing the button repeatedly F will be displayed on the LED The number of copies will be set as 20 When you want to make 10 to 19 copies specify the number of copies to 20 then load the same number of pieces of paper In this case the machine will stop copying in an error Press the Stop Reset button to release the error Pressing the Stop Reset button returns the number of copies to 1 N Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts Fit to Page copying Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is complete e To make high speed copying 1 Hold down the Color or Black button for longer than 2 seconds The LED flashes once 2 Release the button The machine starts high speed copying P important Do not open the Document Cover or remove the original from the Platen Glass
36. Grayscale Preng 5 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Canon lJ Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing Related Topic s gt Canon IJ Preview Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 257 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size Such a paper size is called a custom size The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab 1 Set the custom size in the application software On your application s paper size feature specify the custom size P important When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the height and width values use the application software to set the values When the application software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly use the printer driver to set the values 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the paper size Select Custom for Page Size on the Page Setup tab ask Seno lt gt Man SB Page Setup of Btects
37. In Windows make sure that your machine s name is selected in the Print dialog box In Macintosh make sure that your machine s name is selected in Printer in the Print dialog box ES Note To make the machine the one selected by default select Set as Default Printer Windows Default Printer or Make Default Macintosh Windows e Check 5 Configure the printer port appropriately Configure USBnnn where n is a number as the printer port 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Click Control Panel then Printer under Hardware and Sound In Windows XP click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Control Panel then Printers 3 Right click the Canon XXX Printer icon then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Does Not Start Page 600 of 678 pages Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX Printer appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s If the setting is incorrect reinstall the MP Drivers or change the printer port to the correct one e Check 6 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Pri
38. Mail Dialog Box Page 434 of 678 pages e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear scanner driver screen e Specify Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings e File Size Select a size from Small fits in a 640 by 480 window Medium fits in a 800 by 600 window Large fits in a 1024 by 768 window and Original e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif PDF or PDF Multiple Pages P important You cannot set passwords for PDF files You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White e Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF or PDF Multiple Pages Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the sc
39. Meds Type Porter Paper Size Plain Pape lene sx Onertation Potrat Pree Quality Pager Source Sansa Rese Tray Copies 1 E Aways Bort wth Curert Setings ox ama The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens Nave Qora Cance o 4 Save the settings Set Name then click OK If necessary set the items in Options The printing profile is saved and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 563 of 678 pages P important To save the page size orientation and number of copies that was set in each sheet click Options and check each item Note When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver the print settings you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved If a profile is deleted register the print settings again Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1 Select the printing profile to be deleted Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab 2 Delete the printing profile Click Delete When the confirmation message appears click OK The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Seitings list Note Printing profiles that are registere
40. Preferences from the File menu Crop the photo to apply even margins individually Cropping Photos Photo Print E Note This setting is available for Photo Print only Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is C1 or C4 Page 180 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt What Is C1 or C4 fl E What Is C1 or C4 When an album is printed labels such as C1 and C4 are printed as page numbers The C1 and C4 represent the front cover and back cover respectively C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover C4 Back cover Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photo Print Settings Page 181 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings Photo Print Settings s gt Printing Vivid Photos gt Reducing Photo Noise b Cropping Photos Photo Print s gt Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print s gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page s Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print s gt Printing Photo Information s gt Saving Photos gt Opening Saved Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Vivid Photos Page 182 of 678 pages Advanced Guid
41. Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Appendix Various Scan Settings Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Scanning with the Bundled Application Software What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software Let s Try Scanning Starting MP Navigator EX Scanning Photos and Documents Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Easy Scanning with One click Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Adjusting Images Searching Images Classifying Images into Categories Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Saving Saving as PDF Files Creating Editing PDF Files Printing Documents Printing Photos Sending via E mail Editing Files Setting Passwords for PDF Files Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files MP Navigator EX Screens Navigation Mode Screen Scan Import Documents or Images Tab View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab Custom Scan with One click Tab Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Save Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box PDF Settings Dialog Box View amp Use Window Create Edit PDF file Window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 87 of 678 pages Print Document Dialog Box Print Ph
42. See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 154 of 678 pages ES Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Auto Photo Fix then click OK The entire photo is corrected automatically and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif fil
43. Set Check abum print sattngs Cick the Pring button to print with the current settings Printing starts Prener Canon xox Copias Paper Sue AA Pagar Source Meda Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Pring Quality Duplex Printing the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Med Cop ia Type ies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Se Downloade Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced d from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Prin
44. Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab TR oaks Man 3 Page Setup of Btects Ad Martenance Meds Type Plan Paper Paper Source Res Tay Port Quality High a Sanded Fog Qutom Pian Paper Color rtensty Ago Manual m F Preview betore penting 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is converted to grayscale data It allows you to print the color document in monochrome P important When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked the printer driver processes image data as sRGB data In this case actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data convert the data to sRGB data using an application software EA Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 263 of 678 pages During Grayscale Printing color inks may be used as well as black ink Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Specifying Color Correction Page 264 of 678 pages AJS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printe
45. Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos s Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving s gt Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Layout Page 197 of 678 pages Aana Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX Se Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen then click Es Change Layout Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK Album Edit Took Belja EHe E Applyto all pages aleae DE P important f the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the current layout can be fitted If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames any
46. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping area within the cropping frame AZ MM Check All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view po CC Uncheck All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view Ge EJE Select All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue Select All Cropping Frames This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines The settings will be applied to all the cropping frames tanned Remove Cropping Frame Removes the selected cropping frame PT Information Displays the version of ScanGear scanner driver and the current scan settings document type etc Open Guide This page appears Preview Area e Preview Area This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview You can also check the results of the settings image corrections color adjustments etc made in Settings and Operation Buttons When Ea Thumbnail is displayed on the Toolbar Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed Only the images with the Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Pa
47. Y Reschton x0 Advanced formation ton Ve Descrpten we Date Time Oigral Scene Coote Tyre z Epcare Mode Sua Seeed Vole n Apply the Same Setng of bout tems Atomatesly e Basic Information Displays the information obtained automatically from the machine or software e Advanced Information Displays the information specified on the right side of the screen e Advanced Information Settings Area You can input Exif information such as the title and shooting data Select the checkbox of the items you want to specify and select or enter information e Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically Select this checkbox to automatically display the information you specified for the previous image e Apply After specifying all the information you need click Apply to embed it into the image The information appears in Advanced Information e OK Embeds the specified information into the image and closes the screen The specified information is saved e Cancel Cancels the settings and closes the screen Information is embedded when Cancel is clicked after clicking Apply Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Dialog Box Page 428 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt PDF Dialog Box PDF Dialog Box Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One click tab or click PDF i
48. e Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory Quit other running applications to increase available memory If you still cannot print restart your computer and retry printing e Printer driver could not be found Uninstall the printer driver according to the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers and then reinstall it e Could not print Application name File name Try printing again once the current job is complete MME the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is installed a confirmation screen asking for permission to send the printer usage information will be displayed three months and then six months after the installation After that it will be displayed every six months for about four years Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program feiss A Thank you for your cooperation in Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program For development and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below recorded in your Canon product be collected on your computer and sent to Canon through the Intemet Information related to Canon inkjet printer scanner fax 0S version language and desplay setting information Device driver and application software usage logs Information relate
49. e Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening editing and printing created PDF files s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Rotate Left 90 Rotate Right 90 Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter clockwise or clockwise Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90 or Rotate Right 90 e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Mail Dialog Box Page 433 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt
50. gf tects AH Martenance El Page Sze Lotier 35x117 Fi amp Onertstion A Pora A Langrcoce Rotate 180 degrees Page Layout Nomnslsize a E 5 8 Pign Paper Lemer 85x11 215 S279 dene Nomalsize Bordetess FtoPage Scsed Page Layout 3 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 252 of 678 pages Background Settings Not Saved Ea Background Save setings Select Fie Layout Method Fi page C Ftensty O Defats 4 Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File Select the target bitmap file bmp and then click Open 5 Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed When Custom is selected you can set coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window Intensity Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider To lighten the background move the slider to the left To darken the background move the slider to the right To print the background at the original bitmap intensity move the slider to the rightmost position 6 Save the background Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title b
51. gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Rem you wang to create from the manu Selact LOreey to access saved rems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 111 of 678 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting a Photo Easy PhotoPrint EX g Selecting a Photo 1 Click Photo Print from Menu The Select Images screen appears Select maget tot pinto pining To comect of eniance images chck the ComeclEniance button os Apply comections and erhancemerts in the renaing screen Exif Print a j E Styre a v P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails mi
52. image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted starting with the last image that was added to the former layout page E8 Note a The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover a Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Calendar Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Layout Page 198 of 678 pages 001 002 003 004 005 Edit Took j 006 a E aa V Apply to all pages Baale ES EEE P important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page E Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Layout Print Si i h 001 Edit Tools EES C Apply to all pages gona P important f the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the current layout can be fitted ES Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Pa
53. lt SG 201 gt 3 5 Matte Photo Paper lt MP 101 gt 4 Photo Paper Pro Platinum Photo Paper Pro II Glossy Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Photo Paper Plus Glossy 1l Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss Matte Photo Paper For printing business documents LE Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Can Use Page 50 of 678 pages High Resolution Paper 80 sheets 50 sheets High Resolution Paper lt HR 101N gt For creating your own prints T Shirt Transfers 1 sheet 4 T Shirt Transfers lt TR 301 gt Photo Stickers Glossy Photo Paper lt PS 101 gt 6 1 Paper with a Model Number is Canon genuine paper Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side and notes on handling paper For information on the page sizes available for each Canon genuine paper visit our website You may not be able to purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number Purchase paper by name 2 Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature or humidity In such cases reduce the number of paper you load at a time to less than half 100 recycled paper can be used 3 Paper that can be used for making copies when selecting the media type with the Paper button on
54. of the Platen e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Specify Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The File name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed P important If you select this function you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images cannot be added to password protected PDF files ES Note Click Set to open the PDF Settings dialog box in which you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files gt PDF Settings Dialog Box See Creating Editing PDF Files to delete or rearrang
55. s gt Placing Documents Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Page 309 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images gt Scanning Images Scanning Images You can scan images from the machine to a computer without printing them and save them in popular file formats such as JPEG TIFF bitmap or PDF Select the scanning method according to your purpose s gt Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Scanning with the Bundled Application Software s gt Scanning with Other Application Software Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Before Scanning Page 310 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images gt Before Scanning Before Scanning Before scanning images confirm the following Does the original to be scanned meet the requirements for an original to be set on the Platen Glass Refer to Placing Documents for requirements and how to load the original on the Platen Glass Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Placing Documents Page 311 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images gt Placing Documents Placing Documents Learn how to place documents on the machine s Platen Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly
56. to e mail hoto Using on a website or attaching Grayscale 75 dpi 300 dpi to e mail Text document Copying Color Grayscale or Black 300 dpi and White Attaching to e mail Color Grayscale or Black 300 dpi and White P important f you double the resolution the file size quadruples If the file is too large the processing speed will slow down significantly and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image ES Note Although you can change Output Resolution in ScanGear scanner driver it is recommended that you scan at the default value Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals File Formats Page 528 of 678 pages Nelifielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt File Formats File Formats You can select a file format when saving scanned images You should specify the most suitable format according to how you want to use the image on which application Available file formats vary by application and computer Windows or Macintosh See below for the characteristics of each image file format BMP Standard File Extension bmp A standard file format for Windows BMP is often selected for images that are used only on Windows JPEG Standard File Extension jpg A file format often used on websites and for digital ca
57. 544 of 678 pages ASES Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine gt Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning P important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine a Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials as this may scratch the surface Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page 545 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine gt Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover P important a Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine With a clean soft lint free cloth wipe the Platen Glass A and the inner side of the Document Cover white sheet B gently Be sure not to leave any residue especially on the Platen Glass P important The inner side of the Document Cover white sheet B is easily damaged so wipe it gently Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 546 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Aligning the Print Head
58. 678 pages Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 372 of 678 pages Document Open Password Confirm Document Open Password Piease conten the document open password Be sure to make a note of the password wil be required to open the document Document Open Password C Permissions Password Confirm Password Prease corfem the pemissora password Be sure to make a note of the A password t wil be required to part or edt the document in the future Noto Scene of the appbcatens may be able to bypass the restictions you have set in pemissors password Pemissons Password om Cancel 5 Re enter the password and click OK The Save as PDF file dialog box returns P important f you close the Save as PDF file dialog box without clicking Save the settings in the Password Security Settings dialog box will be deleted Passwords are deleted once the file is edited Reset the passwords when saving edited files EA Note If you set the passwords via the PDF Settings dialog box the PDF Settings dialog box returns Click OK The Save as PDF file dialog box returns 6 Click Save Files are saved according to the settings Related Topic Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page 373 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the
59. A 22 A ass E Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red Green and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel e Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined e Red Adjust the Red channel e Green Adjust the Green channel e Blue Adjust the Blue channel ES Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale Reading Histograms You can open Histogram of a specified area for each Channel The higher the Histogram peak the more data is distributed to that level Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Histogram Page 480 of 678 pages More data is distributed to the More data is distributed to the Data is widely distributed between the highlight side shadow side highlight and shadow Adjusting Histograms Using the Slider Select a Channel then move ai Black point Slider or White point Slider to specify the level to be set as the shadow or highlight All parts to the left of ai Black point Slider will be black level 0 The parts at Mid point Slider will turn to the color exactly between the black point and white point All parts to the right of White point Slider will turn white level 255 Image Adjustment is Auto by default Adjustments shown below are automatically performed Moving
60. Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Enter a password to open or edit print password protected PDF files Password entry method varies by operation The following procedures are examples only P important You can open edit or print only PDF files whose passwords were set with MP Navigator EX You cannot edit PDF files edited in other applications or whose passwords were set with other applications Only MP Navigator EX version 1 1 and 2 0 or later supports opening editing and printing password protected PDF files In Windows 2000 Internet Explorer 5 5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open edit or print password protected PDF files Passwords are case sensitive You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX Entering a Password to Open a File G 1 Inthe View amp Use window select the PDF file you want to open and click aa Zoom in Alternatively double click the PDF file Chek 1 select the mage 97 Potences 2 EEren Ja G a jm come gt Comal C Spectic Categones Edt Gutom Categenes My Bos SeannedAepeted Images Recent Sereas Fonek merit Ben n v Douer aap Seeed X O buinen Coes Butinett Cord fisager 0 Gp Ported D gt Potteod Imogen QO tmdrd Sze POF Fite b Suisia Imager POF File Imag
61. Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Slow Scanning Speed There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Software Problems E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 90 of 678 pages Program Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Does Not Open MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image If You Cannot Resolve the Problem FAQs Instructions for Use Printer Driver General Notes Scanner Driver Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Using MP Navigator EX About Solution Menu Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How to Use This Manual Page 91 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Explanation Window s gt Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual gt Symbols Used in This Document
62. Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 288 of 678 pages P important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when Background is set in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab Define Stamp is selected in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab and the bitmapped stamp is configured Note Depending on images the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing Photo Noise Page 289 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise With the Photo Noise Reduction function you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality of the digital print The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Noise Reduction Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the level 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced ES Note It is recommended to select Normal for most cases Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducin
63. Correct Enhance Images window 3 Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list The selected image appears in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 346 of 678 pages 92 Face Shapener 29 Dita Face Smootwa Ex CAheniUrertame Pictured MP Navigator EONO 01 01 003 jpg E8 Note f you selected only one image in the View amp Use window the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears 4 Click Manual then click Adjust 5 Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level When you move a slider F Correct Enhance appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image Show through Percy d Ent E9 Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save adjusted images as new files EA Note To save only the images you like select them and click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 347 of 678 pages The file format of adjusted images is JPEG Exif 7 Click Exit P important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma
64. Do not hold the FINE Cartridge Holder to stop or move it forcibly Do not touch the FINE Cartridge Holder until it stops completely gt Important The inside of the machine may be stained with ink Be careful not to stain your hands or clothing when replacing FINE Cartridges You can easily wipe off the ink from the inside of the machine with tissue paper or the like For details on the cleaning refer to the printed manual Getting Started Do not place any object on the Document Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction When opening the Scanning Unit Cover lift it with the Document Cover closed Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the machine If the Scanning Unit Cover is left open the FINE Cartridge Holder moves to the right In this case close and reopen the Scanning Unit Cover 3 Remove the empty FINE Cartridge 1 Pinch the tabs and open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover 2 Remove the FINE Cartridge gt Important Handle FINE Cartridges carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area Discard empty FINE Cartridges according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 67 of 678 pages Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 68 of 678 pages 4 Prepare the new FINE Cartridge 1 Take a new FINE Cartridge out of its package
65. Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Threshold Page 485 of 678 pages WelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Setting Threshold Setting Threshold The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255 However in creating black and white images all colors are mapped to either black 0 or white 255 Threshold is the borderline value that determines a color as black or white By adjusting the threshold level you can sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White In ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab click vi Threshold E8 Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Adjusting Threshold Move ai slider to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas Move the slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas You can also enter a value 0 to 255 Oe Light Owk Ora G Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens Page 486 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens The following sections
66. Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Settings on Client PC Page 669 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Client PC Settings on Client PC After setting up the print server system set up the client system The procedure for setting up the client systems is as follows In Windows Vista 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the machine and select Custom Install For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started ES Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation Start the wizard Select the Start menu gt Network gt Add a printer The Add Printer window appears Add a printer Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next E8 Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will
67. EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct enhance EA Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Edit Convert then click Fix photo images on the list Cick 1o selnct the image a4 ae E Taal Zoomin Coro Al v Pota nyat Saias TIe es penan v Oes myil Q ails gt ror Pant Dp D Sond vo Doume magt G EdiyConvest gt Barc Cod leaped dumo to Man Mere C llvert Wserhlame Dictores MP Navigator ENIO MOOL jeg The Correct Enhance Images window opens EA Note Spectic Categones 0T Prefecence a G aja cares Edt Custom Categones 2 The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box In that case only the target image outlined in orange can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 3 Select the image you want to correct enhance from the thumbnail list The selected image appears in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically ct Enhance Images SNS tate j Aado Photo Fix J 92 Face Shapener 29 Dga Fac
68. Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Rem you wang to create from the manu Selact LOreey to access saved rems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 130 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Calendar from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty paper sze etc n General Settings then select a design Cick the button at the bottom to customize calendar elements After spectying paper sae etc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Sre At Sat Holidays Onentaton Portrat AJ Landscape Start from lua Perod L meeth s Design e seamen ml 00 Edit Print Settings Sample Layout 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Start from Period EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can add holidays to your calendar gt Setting Holidays 3 Select a layout for Design If necessary make advanced settin
69. In some applications the commands print edit etc restricted by Permissions Password may differ from those in MP Navigator EX Password protected PDF files cannot be searched by text from the View amp Use Window Scan documents into MP Navigator EX then click Save as PDF file Alternatively edit existing files in the Create Edit PDF file window then click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages The Save as PDF file dialog box opens P important a Passwords cannot be set when images are automatically saved after scanning such as when scanning from the One click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine EA Note a See Let s Try Scanning to scan images See Creating Editing PDF Files to create PDF files from existing images or to edit files Select the Password security settings checkbox Save the image to the spectied folder as a PDF file Save as type POF DAs Poses Geese Password securty settings Tou Can save mutple raps to one PDF fio page i page 2 page 3 Drag the mage to rearrange the pages page Sle name mG Swen C Users Use Nano Pieires HP Navigator EX 2009_0 Browse EF Save to a Sublolder wth Qurert Date gre cancel Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Passwords for PDF Files Y WW Save the mage to the soeofied folder as a PDF fle Save in C AUsers Usertisme Pictures MP Navigator EX 2003_01_01 Brom
70. June to Man Meru View amp Use Window Use the View amp Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images June to Man Mere Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Let s Try Scanning AJAn Giitels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning MP Navigator EX Let s Try Scanning Try scanning using MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Scanning documents photos magazines etc from the Platen Scanning Photos and Documents Scanning two or more photos small documents at one time Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Scanning images larger than the Platen s gt Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Scanning easily according to purpose scan and save attach to e mail etc Easy Scanning with One click Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 322 of 678 pages Starting MP Navigator EX Page 323 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX 1 Double click i Canon MP Navigator EX 3 0 icon on the desktop MP Navigator EX starts fice Scanfiepost View amp Use One click Scan Import Documents or Images Photos Documents
71. ManualsPrinter com Manuals Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Page 178 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Easy PhotoPrint EX Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from As shown below printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout Print screen Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates See your printer manual for details on how to load paper to print on the front back etc Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How Do I Print with Even Margins Page 179 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Do I Print with Even Margins Easy PhotoPrint EX Se How Do I Print with Even Margins When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other depending on the image and printer To always print with even margins select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings in the Layout Print screen or select
72. Mode is Grayscale Brightness Adjust the image brightness Move slider under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 vores Dark Bright E Note Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much and shadows may be lost if you darken the image too much Contrast Contrast is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image Increasing contrast will increase the difference thus sharpening the image Decreasing contrast will decrease the difference thus softening the image Move ai slider under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Decreased contrast Original image Increased contrast ES Note Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three dimensional feel to soft images However shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Histogram Page 479 of 678 pages Anad Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Histogram Adjusting Histogram In ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab click Histogram Auto on Descreen ore od le a A I custom a Defaults ejo
73. P important a Do not place objects on the Document Cover The objects may fall into the machine when the Document Cover is opened This may damage the machine Placing Documents Place documents as described below to allow the machine to detect the document type or size automatically P important When scanning by specifying the document type or size in MP Navigator EX or ScanGear scanner driver align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen Photos that have been cut to various shapes and documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning Reflective CD DVD labels may not be scanned properly Close the Document Cover when scanning When Scanning Photos Postcards Business When Scanning Magazines Newspapers or Text Cards or CD DVD Documents Place the document face down on the Platen and a align an upper corner of the document with the Place the document face down on the Platen with corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen 3 8 inches 1 cm or more space between the Portions placed on the diagonally striped area edges of the Platen and the document Portions cannot be scanned placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned Placing a Single Document gt gt gt gt 4 A 4 4 A 4 4 A A A A A 4 i 4 A 4 r 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 4 rA
74. Page 95 of 678 pages Printing This Manual Page 96 of 678 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print My Manual You can select and print documents registered in My Manual For details about My Manual see Registering Documents to My Manual 1 From Select Target select My Manual The titles of the documents that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list 2 Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select the title check boxes of the documents to be printed Note Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 4 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 5 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print All Documents You can print all documents of the on screen manual 1 From Select Target select All Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list and the check box
75. Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a balanced image Q e Enlarge Enlarges the displayed image e g Reduce Reduces the displayed image aa Full screen Enlarges reduces the image to display it full screen Compare Opens the source image for comparison The source image appears on the left and the corrected image appears on the right o _ D aa A P sy a y Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals One click Mode Screen Page 413 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt One click Mode Screen MP Navigator EX One click Mode Screen Click __ Switch Mode at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One click Mode screen You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon ft Preferences e Auto Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type File format is automatically set Files are saved to a computer You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required When you click this icon the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings s gt Auto Scan Dialog Box e Save Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer The document type can be detected automatically When you click this icon the Save dial
76. Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper For details on Easy PhotoPrint EX refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide EA Note The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows The operations are also the same for printing with Macintosh Install Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Easy PhotoPrint EX select Easy PhotoPrint EX in Custom Install 1 Prepare for printing 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX and select Photo Print 1 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX time Double click gt Easy PhotoPrint EX on the desktop 2 click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX acintosh Select the Go menu Applications Canon Utilities Easy PhotoPrint EX then double click Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Note time Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu double click lt Solution Menu on the desktop and click gt Print photos or al
77. Scan Tab Color Settings Tab Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting Cropping Frames Resolution File Formats Color Matching Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Copying Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Copying Making Copies Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Using Useful Copy Functions Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Machine Cannot Be Powered On An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Alarm Lamp is lit Orange Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately LED Cannot Be Seen At All Cannot Install the MP Drivers Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Print Results Not Satisfactory Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Colors Are Unclear Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Printing Does Not Start Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 89 of 678 pages Copying Printing Stops Before It ls Completed Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Mov
78. Select Change If you select Yes after you have followed the on screen instructions the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey If you select No the information will be sent automatically ES Note If you select Uninstall or Remove the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is uninstalled Follow the on screen instructions MIA the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is installed the printer usage information is scheduled to be sent three months and then six months after the installation After that it is scheduled to be sent every six months for about four years The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon appears in the Dock when it is time to send the printer usage information In Mac OS X v 10 3 9 the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is not installed Read the instructions on the screen after clicking the icon then follow the procedure below Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 615 of 678 pages r Thank you for your cooperation in Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey d Program For development and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below recorded in your Canon product be collected on your computer and sent to Canon through the Internet infor
79. Tomy gt Pope Lavoe v Homa sre Pinte dmm iz Nommatsize Letter 8 5 x11 100 Pisin Peper as op humm 1 Oe Se peer _ Pager See v Pty kd AA Meda Tipe e Printer Select the printer to use e Paper Source Select paper source e Page Layout Select a print type e Normal size Printing Print one image per sheet e Scaled Printing Print images at the selected scale enlarged or reduced e Fit to Page Printing Print an image at the paper size enlarged or reduced e Borderless Printing Print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins e Page Layout Printing 2 on 1 Layout and print two images on a sheet of paper e Page Layout Printing 4 on 1 Layout and print four images on a sheet of paper e Enlarge Reduce Enlarge or reduce images to print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Document Dialog Box Page 404 of 678 pages e _ Enlarge Reduce Print a reduced or enlarged image by specifying a scale in increments of 1 e Auto Scale is adjusted automatically according to the detected paper width and the selected paper size Image may be printed rotated 90 degrees depending on its size e Scale Select a scale from the list P important At normal size 100 some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped In that case select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size e Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing Match
80. Use the scanner diyer Save Setings T Atomaticaly save the mage to your computer aher scarring t Fie name MG Save as type Ato Saven C Users LiserName Pichres MP Navigate Sarro to a Sudfolder rth Curert Date we the JPEG Ed file in AdobeRGE J Open the save ddog box after scanning the image out Bd information Foplcation Settings Open with Nowe Deen the Mew 3 Use dialog bax Reset E Start scanning by chcking the one click button Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned When Auto Mode is selected the document type is automatically detected In that case Color Mode Document Size and Resolution are automatically set as well P important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode In that case specify the document type or size Documents other than photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and CD DVD A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD DVD labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents ES No
81. With ScanGear scanner driver scanning images via a scanner is the input and displaying to a monitor is the output Tone Curve shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Tone Curve Page 483 of 678 pages Highlight Output brightness Shadow Shadow Highlight Input brightness Adjusting Tone Curve In Select Tone Curve select a tone curve from No correction Overexposure Underexposure High contrast Reverse the negative positive image and Edit custom curve No correction No adjustment Overexposure Convex curve The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side resulting ina bright toned image when viewed on a monitor Underexposure Concave curve The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side resulting in a dark toned image when viewed on a monitor High contrast S curve The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced resulting in a high contrast image Reverse the negative positive image Downward sloping line The input and output sides are reversed resulting in a negative positive inverted image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Tone Curve Page 484 of 678 pages Edit custom curve You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas Page top
82. a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper the machine may pause temporarily In either case wait until the process is complete ES Note If you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document printing may pause to allow the ink to dry Check 4 If copying stops before it is completed try to copy again If a certain time passes after some errors occurred while copying the machine stops the operation Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Page 602 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected e Check 1 Are the Print Head nozzles clogged Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved a
83. action then click OK From the next time MP Navigator EX is automatically started P important If the position or size of an image is not scanned correctly depending on the type of the original refer to Scanning Photos and Documents and change Document Type and Document Size settings of MP Navigator EX to match the original being scanned e If You Want to Edit or Print the Scanned Images MP Navigator EX enables you to edit the scanned images such as optimizing or trimming You can also start application software from MP Navigator EX to edit or print the scanned images s gt Let s Try Scanning e If You Want to Scan Originals with Advanced Settings ScanGear enables you to scan originals with advanced settings such as the resolution s gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver ES Note You can use a TWAIN or WIA Windows Vista and Windows XP only compliant application software and the Control Panel Windows Vista and Windows XP only to scan originals with this machine For details refer to Other Scanning Methods Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Various Scan Settings Page 316 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Appendix Various Scan Settings Appendix Various Scan Settings e Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine
84. an area is not specified the document will be scanned at the document size Auto Crop If an area is specified only the portion in the specified area will be scanned gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Set Destination Set Output Size Set Image corrections as required Click Scan Areas framed by broken lines are scanned Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 467 of 678 pages Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 468 of 678 pages Note ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box Scan Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 469 of 678 pages Nelieiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver The following sections provide you with tips and know how on advanced scanning techniques involving color brightness adjustment etc e Sharpening out of focus photos reducing dust and scratches and correcting faded colors s gt Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc e Previewing and changing the color tone of the entire image to scan Adjustin
85. an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click tal Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click a Delete All Imported Images Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 141 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede stickers as needed Insart taxt add imagas or change bayout L AA j ae 4 GJ gt BA 2 Edit the stickers if necessary Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited stickers It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again gt Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 142 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Printing Prin
86. and without borders on the photo paper Cancel the Fit to Page copy function to copy the original in the same size See Fit to Page Copying 3 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts copying While copying is in progress the number on the LED flashes and decreases by one to indicate the remaining number of copies to be made Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is completed To make 10 to 19 copies The paper out error will occur E 0 2 will appear on the LED when all of the loaded paper runs out Press the Stop Reset button to release the error EA Note You can set the print quality to Fast speed priority only when A4 or Letter sized plain paper is selected for the page size and media type To set the print quality to Fast speed priority 1 Press and hold down the Color or Black button for 2 or more seconds in 3 of step 2 The LED flashes once When you press the Color or Black button for less than 2 seconds the machine starts copying in the print quality Standard 2 Release the button The machine starts copying When the print quality is set to Fast print speed is given priority over quality To give priority to quality press the Color or Black button for less than 2 seconds to copy in the print quality Standard gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until copying is co
87. as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the Simulate Illustration If necessary check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab and adjust the Contrast Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the image data The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed so that it looks hand drawn Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 282 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color Representing Image Data with a Single Color With the Monochrome Effects function you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Monochrome Effects Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color When you use Select Color move the Color slider to specify the color you want The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Canca MP2
88. check box in the displayed dialog e Check 4 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used thin lines may not be printed Try thickening the lines in the document Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Page 590 of 678 pages Advancedemde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots gt Printed Paper Curls 000000000000 0000 0K Printed Paper Has Ink Blots e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion Confirm the intensity using the printer driver s gt Adjusting Intensity e Check 3 Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color we recommend using Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon speciality paper Loading Paper Originals Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 591 of 678
89. com Manuals Loading Envelopes Page 46 of 678 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper gt Loading Envelopes m Loading Envelopes You can print on European DL and US Comm Env 10 sized envelopes The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope s direction by specifying with the printer driver properly gt Important You can only print on envelopes with the computer You cannot use the following envelopes Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive E8 Note In Windows the message on how to load envelopes will appear when printing on them This message will not appear next time if you select the Do not show this message again check box 1 Prepare envelopes e Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them e f the envelopes are curled hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite direction e f the corner of the envelope flap is folded flatten it e Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the crease x x x O d T C O eee The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope gt Important The envelopes may jam in the machine if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned Make sure that no curl or puff exce
90. com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 138 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Rem you wang to create from the manu Selact LOreey to access saved rems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 139 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Se Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Stickers from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Specty paper sze etc n General Settings then selact a Byout After spectying paper sae atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Ste Photo Suckers E prrt date Date Settings A Portrat AJ tandscape Euse the same mage n al frames 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames ES Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selecte
91. correct enhance all selected images 7 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected enhanced images as new files Note To save only the images you like select them and click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images The file format of corrected enhanced images is JPEG Exif Adobe RGB images are saved as sRGB images 8 Click Exit P important The corrections enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Page 342 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Correcting Enhancing Images Manually MP Navigator EX Correcting Enhancing Images Manually You can correct enhance scanned images manually 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct enhance EA Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Edit Convert then click Fix photo images on the list ick to select the image 9 _ Paefecences BH eh conn a O a ja Cares Coro Al Spectic Categones Hy B
92. correctly from standby mode In that case restart the computer Do not connect two or more machines or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same computer simultaneously If multiple scanning devices are connected you cannot scan from the Operation Panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices Software screens may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when font size is set to Larger scale If you want to display the screens with Larger scale fonts change the theme in Appearance and Personalization to Windows Classic as follows 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel 2 Select Appearance and Personalization gt Personalization gt Theme The Theme Settings dialog box opens 3 On the Theme tab of the Theme Settings dialog box select Windows Classic under Theme 4 Click OK Desktop changes to Windows Classic view Use the default display font size of the OS Otherwise software screens may not appear correctly Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode In that case follow these steps and scan again 1 Turn off the machine 2 Exit ScanGear scanner driver then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it 3 Turn on the machine ScanGear scanner driver cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time Within an application ScanGear scanner driver cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open
93. counter clockwise R Rotate Right Rotates the page 90 degrees clockwise Preview Mode Switches to Preview Mode The selected file appears in Preview i lt lt gt gt i Delete Selected Pages Ahi Page Save Selected Pages Freh Save Ad Pages MGi A Enlarge Enlarges the image displayed in Preview e g Reduce Reduces the image displayed in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals C Usert Userhleme Picbares VD Navigate BOID ANIMS ONL jpg Page 401 of 678 pages Create Edit PDF file Window ma Full screen Enlarges reduces the image to display it fully in Preview me Thumbnail Mode Switches to Thumbnail Mode Thumbnails of files are displayed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top Page 402 of 678 pages Print Document Dialog Box Page 403 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Print Document Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Print Document Dialog Box Click Print in the View amp Use window then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document dialog box In the Print Document dialog box you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images at one time E9 Note The setting items in the Print Document dialog box vary by printer Prietor Papar Source Pax
94. cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select a layout you want to use Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer paper size and media type 3 Click Print P important When you print on large size paper such as A3 A3 some computers cannot print properly if you print more than one page or copy at a time It is recommended that you print page by page when you print on such paper While printing on paper larger than A4 or printing high resolution images data may be printed only to the middle if many images are printed at one time In such cases select the Spool print job page by page checkbox in the Preferences dialog box and then print again Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 115 of 678 pages E To display the Preferences dialog box click fT Settings or select Preferences from the File menu The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again Saving Photos When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may S5 become wider than the other s gt How Do Print with Even Margins Note You can crop images or print dates on
95. cropped scan areas are specified automatically according to the document size 4 Set Destination 5 Set Output Size 6 Adjust the scan areas cropping frames and set Image corrections as required E9 Note a You can correct each image separately Select the frame you want to correct n thumbnail view you can only create one cropping frame scan area per image To create multiple cropping frames in an image scan in whole image view s gt Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View 7 Select the images you want to scan Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver 8 Click Scan Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan multiple documents as a single image E8 Note 1 2 D 5 6 Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view After previewing images click aza Thumbnail on the Toolbar Switch to whole image view Note When the whole image is displayed the icon changes to aa Whole Image Adjust the scan areas cropping frames Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame scan area on the preview image You can also create two or more cropping frames If
96. desired color tones you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose Color Management Devices such as digital cameras scanners monitors and printers handle color differently Color management color matching is a method that manages device dependent colors as a common color space For Windows a color management system called ICM is built into the operating system Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces Adobe RGB has a wider color space than sRGB ICC profiles convert device dependent colors into a common color space By using an ICC profile and carrying out color management you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color reproduction area that the printer can express Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data The recommended printing method depends on the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data or the application software to be used There are two typical printing methods Check the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data and the application software to be used and then select the printing method suited to your purpose Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver e To print using Canon Digital Photo Color The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer reproducing colors of the
97. file format when Save as type is Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 420 of 678 pages Auto In that case select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned Images cannot be added to password protected PDF files You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White ES Note When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards CD DVD and business cards JPEG Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change the file format from Set Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application In that case select an option other than Auto in Save as type If you select JPEG Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable e Set When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images Select a file format for Document and Photo each When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following fold
98. from the wall outlet or turn off the extender cable connector If you press the ON button to turn off the power the machine caps the Print Head nozzles automatically to prevent from drying If you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet or turn off the extender cable connector before the Power lamp is turned off the Print Head will not be capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging To disconnect the power plug be sure to follow this procedure e Print periodically Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time even if it is capped the Print Head too may become dried or clogged if the machine has not been used for a long time We recommend you to use the machine at least once a month Note Depending on the type of paper ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint stick or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area mw Colors are uneven and print results are blurred Tip Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the nozzles are clogged If the print head nozzles are clogged colors may become uneven or the print results may be blurred Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 82 of 678 pages In this case a Print the nozzle check pattern Check the printed check pattern to see if the nozzles are clogged See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are
99. in Basic Mode Scanning in Basic Mode In Basic Mode you can scan easily by following the on screen steps This section explains how to scan a single document See Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver to scan multiple documents at one time P important Lf The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case click Er Thumbnail on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly Documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes 1 Place the document on the Platen then start ScanGear scanner driver Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver P important Place the document face down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen 2 Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen Gutter shadow corrector Color Pattern Note Toscan magazines containing many color photos select Magazine Color Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Basic Mode 3 4 5 6 7 8 Click Preview Preview image appears in the Preview area SS ew Bas Mode Advanced M
100. in the Page Layout Printing dialog box and click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page Layout Printing Page 237 of 678 pages Page Layout Printing ex Posen Poga Pert a ta Page Order oe tone Page Borger CE Gea Gem Ge Pages To increase the number of pages to be included on a single sheet of paper select a desired number of pages from the list You can also set 2 Page Print or 4 Page Print on the Quick Setup tab Page Order To change the page arrangement order select an icon from the list to change the page placement order Page Border To print a page border around each document page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Poster Printing Page 238 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Poster Printing Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data divide it into several pages and print these pages on separate sheets of paper When the pages are pasted together they form a large print like a poster sa Csi The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows Setting P
101. in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears JD Auto Photo Fix oS RedEye Conection 92 Face Shapenet os Diza Face Smocthing En CA Users User Name gitljpg E9 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview ES Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Blemish Remover Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjust pe oS RedEye Comection 22 Face Baghtens 92 Face Shapenct oS Digal Face Smoctheg 99 Blemish Remover Soncdly the xey you wort to corect EA Note Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Moles in and around the selected area are removed andthe amp Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E8 Note
102. is Auto Detect Auto Detect Multiple Documents or Stitch Assist Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen Note Use ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set For details see Gutter Shadow Correction in Image Settings ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab e Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle within 0 1 to 10 degrees or 0 1 to 10 degrees of the document P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text Documents with extremely large or small fonts Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page 389 of 678 pages Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures images or hand written text Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines tables Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document e Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate ima
103. may not display the TWAIN user interface In that case refer to the application s manual and change the settings accordingly e Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents In some cases only the first scanned image is accepted or multiple images are scanned as one image e When scanning platen size images into a Microsoft Office application such as Word Excel or PowerPoint click Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen Otherwise images may not be scanned correctly e Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications In that case increase the operating system s virtual memory and retry e When image size is too large such as when scanning large images at high resolution your computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 depending on the application In that case cancel the action for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar then increase the operating system s virtual memory or reduce the image size resolution and retry Alternatively scan the image via MP Navigator EX first then save and import it into the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Page 647 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix Appendix s gt Printing Area gt How to Detach Attach the Document Cover Deleting the Undesired Print Job Updating the MP Drivers s gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manu
104. not resolve the print head problem 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning 3 Execute deep cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute Click OK when the confirmation message appears Print head deep cleaning starts 4 Complete deep cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Heads Page 551 of 678 pages 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel P important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer s ink supply Consequently perform cleaning only when necessary Note If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning switch off the machine wait 24 hours and then perform Deep Cleaning again If there is still no sign of improvement refer to Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Related Topic s gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 552 of 678
105. of 678 pages NelFllesel tiffs Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab When you are not able to specify them with the application the procedure for selecting a page size and orientation is as follows You can also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper size Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab FR ck Sen Man B Pave Serco of tects if Mortenance El Page Sze Letter 8 511 amp Orientation Aj Pora A Rotate 180 degrees Page Layout Noensisize Plan Paper al sal x g E pien ee ran St Pa 3 Set Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top
106. off The machine is not powered on Connect the power cord and press the ON button If the Power lamp is lit The LED may be in the screen saver mode On the Operation Panel press a button other than the ON button Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 577 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Install the MP Drivers Cannot install the MP Drivers e If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD ROM is inserted into your computer s disc drive Windows Start the installation following the procedure below 1 Click Start then Computer In Windows XP click Start then My Computer In Windows 2000 double click the My Computer icon on the desktop 2 Double click the CD ROM icon on the displayed window If the contents of the CD ROM are displayed double click MSETUP4 EXE Mr Double click the 2 CD ROM icon on your desktop to start installation E8 Note Ifthe CD ROM icon is not displayed try the following e Remove the CD ROM from your computer then insert it again e Restart your computer Ifthe icon is still not displayed try different discs and see if they are displayed If other discs are displayed there is a problem with the Setup CD ROM In this case contact the service center e If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen Downloaded from ManualsPrinter co
107. on using images files e Creating editing PDF files from scanned images s gt Creating Editing PDF Files Printing multiple scanned images at one time or printing at specific size quality etc gt Printing Documents Printing scanned photos gt Printing Photos e Sending scanned images via e mail s gt Sending via E mail Correcting enhancing scanned images or converting them to text s gt Editing Files Setting passwords for created PDF files Setting Passwords for PDF Files Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Page 355 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Saving MP Navigator EX Saving Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer 1 Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save then click Save sm cme Document Type ER Color Photo ick to slot tho nage 1T Prtenoes 2 BH AS MO onn aj Se yom a lt Eze Emed Dune 2 Cunaved t Document Sae ado Detect Mutplo Documents Reshsion Wi Speci O Use he sorne diver Clear Selections Seve ot PDF fe Jumo to Man Meru f 2 In the Save dialog box specify the save settings Specify the destination folder file name and file type gt Save Dialog Box Save in
108. open if Easy PhotoPrint EX is installed Easy PhotoPrint EX starts instead PDF files cannot be printed E Note Double click an image to display it in a different window e Printer Select the printer to use Properties Displays the selected printer s advanced setting screen e Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine e Media Type Select the type of paper for printing Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type e Page Layout Select a print type e Normal size Printing Print one image per sheet e Fit to Page Printing Print an image at the paper size enlarged or reduced e Borderless Printing Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Photo Dialog Box Page 406 of 678 pages Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins P important Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing Orientation Specify the print orientation P important This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal size Printing For others the image is automatically rotated according to the aspect ratio of the paper Copies Specify the number of copies to print Vivid Photo Select this checkbox to print the image in vivid colors Preview before printing Select this checkbox
109. original image data and producing three dimensional effects and high sharp contrasts e To print by directly applying editing and touch up results of an application software When printing the data the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact When printing the data the printer applies fine adjustment results such as brightness adjustments made with an application software Printing with ICC Profiles Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 267 of 678 pages AJS Gites Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print SRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color When
110. other type of paper may substantially reduce printing quality and or result in printouts with altered color hues Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality Use them only for test printing You can perform Borderless Printing on plain paper only when printing from your computer Borderless Printing is not available for legal A5 or B5 sized paper or envelopes Depending on the type of paper Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and bottom edges of the paper or cause these parts to become smudged Letter Legal gt Envelopes s Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page 649 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes po Size Printable Area width x height AS 556 X 7 95 inches 141 2x202 0mm A4 8 00 X 11 38 inches 203 2x289 0mm Boy 6 90 x 9 80 inches 175 2x249 0mm 4 x6 10x15cm 8 73 x 5 69 inches 94 8 x 144 4mm a x8 10x20cm 3 73 x 7 69 inches 94 8x195 2mm 5 x7 13x18cm 4 73 x 6 69 inches 120 2x169 8mmM 8 x10 20x25cm 7 73 x 9 69 inches 196 4x246 0mm ide 3 73 x 6 80 inches 94 8x1726mm For MP270 series this page size can be used only when printing from your computer 4 0 12 in 3 0 mm t 1 23 in 31 2 mm
111. out and is unavailable when Date Time User Name is selected e Placement tab Select the stamp position from the Position list You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window To change the stamp position angle type a value in the Orientation box directly 5 Save the stamp Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 6 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings 1 Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 249 of 678 pages Registering a Stamp 2 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window Overwrite save the stamp Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab When you want to save the stamp with a different title type a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again Th
112. pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleans the paper feed roller Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows z Roller Cleaning Prepare the machine Remove all sheets of paper from the rear tray N Open the printer driver setup window w Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The confirmation message appears 4 Execute paper feed roller cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and click OK Paper feed roller cleaning starts 5 Complete paper feed roller cleaning After the rollers have stopped follow the instruction in the message load three sheets of plain paper into the rear tray and click OK Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Position Page 553 of 678 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Aligning the Print Head Position Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines This machine supports two head alignment methods aut
113. pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Printed Surface Are Smudged Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the appropriate type of paper used Check the followings e Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose Loading Paper Originals e When performing Borderless Printing make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless Printing If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing the print quality may be reduced at the top and bottom edges of the paper s gt Printing Area e Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl e For Plain Paper Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side Leaving the paper loaded on the Rear Tray for a long time may cause the paper to curl In this case load the paper with the other side facing up It may resolve the problem We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface For Other Paper If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0 1 inch 3 mm A in height the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly In such cases follo
114. pages Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 418 of 678 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen MP Navigator EX Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One click tab or click Save in the One click Mode screen to open the Save dialog box YY Scan photos or documents and save then to your computer Scan Setings Documert Tygo Auto Mode x T Use the scanner dtyer Sey Save Setings Atonaticaly save the mage to your computer after scanning File rane SG Save as tye Ate z Se Sven CALs UserName Pictures MP Navigate Browse j F Sarre to a Subfolder wth Curent Date Sarre the JPEG Ex fo in Adobo RGB Open the sawe dalog bax after scanning the mage hout Ed irlomston Aopicaton Settings Open wth Nene Open the View amp Use dalog bax X E Sar scanning by cicking the one chck button o oe Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned When Auto Mode is selected the document type is automatically detected In that case Color Mode Document Size and Resolution are automatically set as well P important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode In that case specify the document type or size Documents other than photos postca
115. print server system Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e The bi directional communication function is disabled and the correct printer status may not be recognized When a client user opens the printer driver properties and then clicks OK with the Enable bidirectional support check box on the Ports tab unchecked the bi directional function of the printer server system may also be disabled In this case check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the client system e When you print from a client system you cannot use Canon lJ Preview e When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system they may be grayed out In this case change the settings from the print server When you change the settings of the print server you should delete the icon of the shared printer from the client system and then specify the shared settings again in the client system When the Same Printer Driver is Installed in the Print Server System and the Client System as the Local Printer e The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 672 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Transforming Your Photos into Creati
116. printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them use a printing ICC profile in the application software and select settings for color management The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab DR cick Sep D Man B Page Setup af Etocs A Martenance Meds Tipe Pian Facer Ei Paper Source Rox Tray Port Quality Hoh Sands D oie Qustom Pisin Paper Color irtensty Leter 8 57x11 215 279 dem S Ago Preview betore panting 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select Driver Matching for Color Correction Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 268 of 678 pages T Manual Coler Adjustment lee Calor Correction KM None 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK
117. s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click tal Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click a Delete All Imported Images Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 133 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede calendar as needed Insert taxt add rages of change Gyout Toa Na 2 ele mp BS lt gt a Basa General Toos A wy X 39 A ote y Mon Ostrbute 2 Edit the calendar if necessary s gt Changing Layout Changing Background gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos b Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited calendar It is recommended that you save the item if
118. saving images scanned with MP Navigator EX EA Note The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Specify Folder Opens the View amp Use window with Specify Folder selected You can open and use images saved in specific folders e Recently Saved Images Opens the View amp Use window with Recently Saved Images selected You can open and use Scanned Imported Images and images that have been Attached to E mail or Sent to Application recently s gt View amp Use Window e p keai Mode Switches to One click Mode screen In the One click Mode screen you can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon s gt One click Mode Screen e Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears fT Preferences Preferences Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View _Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 380 of 678 pages The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box lewi Opens this guide Related Topic Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com M
119. scan photos o documents j Y lt BE ta cats Pio OO 1 Place Documeats Open the document cover and place the photo or Document Type Ameri onthe ien nit Color Photo oS pi 2 Select Docessent Typo Aado Detect Mutiple Document Se een E Rescktion War pects O Use te cower os Click Scan Scanning tats moto Man Meru Scanning starts When scanning is completed the Scan Complete dialog box opens Select Scan or Exit Select Scan to scan the next document or select Exit to end The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Photos and Documents Page 327 of 678 pages a O Cmon MP Navigatore W Ca a 97 Preteemces _ 2 JSC aome Scan corcieted ri Ock Eat end To cartre seaming load the next documert and cick Scan Can e D Use he soare diver Clear Selections H Jumo to Man Meru 6 Edit the scanned images as required Use Edit Tools to rotate images select a part of an image etc See the Edit Tools in Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window for details Note First select images to edit Selected images are outlined in orange Drag the mouse or use Shift arrow keys to select multiple images 7 Save the scanned images gt Saving Saving as PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning
120. section describes the procedure to scan originals using the Operation Panel on the machine and save them on the computer according to the settings specified with MP Navigator EX For the operation on scanning from the computer refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide gt Important Please note that Canon shall not be liable for any damage or loss of the data for any reason whatsoever even within the warranty period of the machine m Preparing for Scanning with the Operation Panel Before scanning originals check the following Are the necessary software applications MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX installed If the software applications are not installed refer to the printed manual Getting Started Are the required settings specified with MP Navigator EX When you scan to save originals on the computer using the Operation Panel you can specify the settings for saving scanned data in Preferences of MP Navigator EX For details on the settings refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Does the original to be scanned meet the requirements for the original to be set on the Platen Glass For details see Originals You Can Load Is the machine connected to a computer correctly Confirm that the connection between the machine and the computer is physically secure gt Important Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is scanning originals When You Are Using Mac OS X v 10 3 9 You need to se
121. settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window mn Page Sze Letter 8 5511 gt amp Onentation a Porat A ungewe f Rotate 180 degrees BB Prete Peer Sze Leter 85x 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set the margin for stapling and the margin width Click Specify and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box and then click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Booklet Printing Page 242 of 678 pages C Mogn for taping Lek ea hoer blank page Magn 04 gt nhs 0012 Page Border Canent_ Ont tiep Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed Insert blank page To leave one side of a sheet blank check the check box and select the page to be left blank Margin Enter the margin width The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page Page Border To print a page border around each document page check the check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper When the printing of one side is complete set the paper correctly by following the message and click OK When the printing of the other side is complete fold the paper
122. sheet on the Platen Glass then close the Document Cover gently Place the print head alignment sheet with the printed side FACING DOWN and align the mark or the upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark Y Make sure that U uppercase U appears on the LED and press the Black or Color button The print head alignment sheet is scanned and the print head position is adjusted automatically When adjusting the print head position is complete the LED returns to the copy standby mode Remove the sheet on the Platen Glass P important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded print head alignment sheet until scanning is completed If adjusting the auto print head position has failed the error code appears on the LED An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED ES Note If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above adjust the print head position manually from the computer s Aligning the Print Head Position To print the current head position adjustment values display L on the LED then press the Black or Color button Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page 549 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads s Cleaning the Paper Feed Roll
123. source image due to the Image Adjustment In that case set Image Adjustment to None e Unsharp Mask When this is set to ON the outline of the subjects is emphasized to sharpen the image This setting is ON by default e Descreen Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect This setting is OFF by default Note Even if Descreen is set to ON some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON In that case set Unsharp Mask to OFF Selecting Magazine Color in Select Source in Basic Mode tab has the same effect as setting Descreen to ON in Advanced Mode tab e Reduce Dust and Scratches Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches Use this function to reduce such noise This setting is None by default e None Dust and scratches will not be reduced e Low Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches Large ones may remain e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this to reduce small large dust particles and scratches Evidence of the reduction process may remain and may also remove delicate parts of the image P important This function may not be effective for some types of photos Note It is recommended that you select None
124. stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the sections where the stamp and the document data overlap When this check box is unchecked the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections depending on the application used Stamp first page only To print the stamp only on the first page check this check box Define Stamp button To change the stamp text bitmap or position click this refer to Registering a Stamp 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified stamp Printing a Background Two bitmap files are pre registered as samples 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background dialog box opens 3 Select the background Check the Background check box and select a desired background from the list The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the background details If necessary complete the following settings and then click OK Background first page only To print the background only on the first page check this check box Select Background button To use another background or change the layout or density of a background click this refer to Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Se
125. sure to specify the paper settings After loading paper be sure to select the loaded paper in Media Type of the printer driver or with the Paper button on the Operation Panel If the type of paper is not selected you may not be able to get the satisfactory print result See Copying Printing from Your Computer and Media Types You Can Use There are various types of paper paper with special coating on the surface for printing photos with optimal quality and paper suitable for documents Media Type of the printer driver has different settings for each type of paper in advance such as using ink ejecting ink or distance from nozzles so that you can print on each paper with the optimal image quality The Paper button on the Operation Panel which is used for making copies also has some settings similar to Media Type of the printer driver You can print with different settings in Media Type of the printer driver or with the Paper button on the Operation Panel suitable for each type of loaded paper m Use the Stop Reset button to cancel printing Tip Never press the ON button If you press the ON button while printing is in progress the print data sent from the computer queues in the machine and you may not be able to continue to print Press the Stop Reset button to cancel printing Note If you cannot cancel printing by pressing the Stop Reset button while printing from a computer open the printer driver setup window to delete th
126. the Operation Panel You can only select A4 or Letter sized plain paper A4 or Letter sized photo paper and 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper 4 We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration 5 When loading paper in stacks the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly In this case load one sheet at a time 6 You can easily specify print settings for sticker paper with Easy PhotoPrint EX provided on the Setup CD ROM Install it on your computer Note For details on the page size and media type settings when printing from a PictBridge compliant device refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide MP270 series only Page Sizes You can use the following page sizes Note In Macintosh Choukei 3 and Choukei 4 are not available Standard sizes Letter 8 50 x 11 00 inches 215 9 x 279 4 mm Legal 8 50 x 14 00 inches 215 9 x 355 6 mm A5 5 83 x 8 27 inches 148 0 x 210 0 mm A4 8 27 x 11 69 inches 210 0 x 297 0 mm B5 7 17 x 10 12 inches 182 0 x 257 0 mm 4 x 6 4 00 x 6 00 inches 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 4 00 x 8 00 inches 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 5 00 x 7 00 inches 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 8 00 x 10 00 inches 20 x 25 cm L 3 50 x 5 00 inches 89 0 x 127 0 mm 2L 5 00 x 7 01 inches 127 0 x 178 0 mm Hagaki 3 94 x 5 83 inches 100 0
127. the Preview area s gt Preview Area Clear Click this button to delete the preview image It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse Move Image If an enlarged image is too large to fit in the Preview area you can click this button and drag the image across the screen until the part you want to see is displayed You can also move the image using the scroll bars S Enlarge Reduce Click this button then click on the image to enlarge it zoom in Right click on the image to reduce it zoom out E e a Rotate Left Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again 3 e Ea Rotate Right Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again 4 7a Auto Crop Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping area within the cropping frame MiMi e MM Check All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view opo e OO Uncheck All Frames This button is available when two or mo
128. the inside may become stained with ink Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Page 596 of 678 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper type and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the size of the loaded paper correct The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that specified in the printer driver Set the paper size correctly according to the paper you loaded s gt Print Results Not Satisfactory ES Note The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting This machine performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean A small amount of ink is ejected for cleaning Although ink is usually ejected on the ink absorber it may be ejected on the paper if you load paper larger than that specified with the printer driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 597 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
129. the predefined items To delete an item select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete Click Save to save settings displayed in Favorite Settings List ES Note You can set Add Delete in Favorite Settings after preview Save up to 10 items e Input Settings Specify the input settings such as the document type and size Input Settings e Output Settings Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size s gt Output Settings e Image Settings Enable disable various image correction functions s Image Settings e Color Adjustment Buttons These buttons can be used to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones You can adjust the image s overall brightness or contrast and adjust its highlight and shadow values histogram or balance tone curve Color Adjustment Buttons e Zoom Zooms in on an image or the portion within the cropping frame When the image is zoomed in Zoom changes to Undo Click Undo to return the display to its non magnified state In thumbnail view Zooms in on the selected image Click Ki D Frame Advance at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next frame EA Note You can also zoom in on an image by double clicking the frame Double click the frame again to return the display to its non magnified state In whole image view Rescans the portion within the cropping frame at higher magnification ES Note Zoom rescans the image and displ
130. the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey To send the information automatically see Changing the confirmation screen setting e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 614 of 678 pages To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program click Uninstall then follow the on screen instructions e Changing the confirmation screen setting 1 Select items the Start menu as shown below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Uninstall a program e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs E9 Note In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting up software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue 2 Select Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 3
131. to change the setting select another value from the list 5 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK 6 Complete the setup Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Duplex Printing Page 244 of 678 pages Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper When the printing of one side is complete load the paper correctly by following the message and click OK The document will be printed on the opposite side P important Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable when A media type other than Plain Paper is selected from the Media Type list gt Poster is selected from the Page Layout list When Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed out and are unavailable Note When you select borderless printing during duplex printing a dialog box for media type selection may appear If that happens select Plain Paper If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing perform Bottom Plate Cleaning in the Maintenance tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Stamp Background Printing Page 245 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing Stamp Background P
132. to display the print result before printing Print Starts printing Note Only the images in the Thumbnail window with the checkbox selected are printed Close Closes the dialog box without printing the photo Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Send via E mail Dialog Box Page 407 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Send via E mail Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Send via E mail Dialog Box Click Send in the View amp Use window then click Attach to E mail on the list to open the Send via E mail dialog box In the Send via E mail dialog box you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e mail P important a MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e mail software programs Windows Mail Windows Vista Outlook Express Windows XP Windows 2000 Microsoft Outlook If an e mail software program does not operate properly check that the program s MAPI is enabled To enable MAPI refer to the manual of the e mail software program A G Stan a mal program and attach the mage to emal Mal Pogan None Attach Manush 7 Adus ottachmers fle site Sze Medium fts in a 800 by 600 window bd Save in C Weers Wkerttame Pictures MP Navigator EX Mal_20050101 Browse Ble name ING Siha Co C a Mail Program The e mail software program set up via Pre
133. until copying is complete Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Page 302 of 678 pages ES Note High speed copying is suitable for printing text only documents on plain paper If the quality is not as good as expected try normal copying When you want to make 10 to 19 copies specify the number of copies to 20 then load the same number of pieces of paper In this case the machine will stop copying in an error Press the Stop Reset button to release the error To cancel copying press the Stop Rest button Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Useful Copy Functions Page 303 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Using Useful Copy Functions Using Useful Copy Functions e Borderless copy You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders gt Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter Page 304 of 678 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Using Useful Copy Functions gt Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter You can switch the size of paper loaded on the Rear Tray between A4 and Letter 1 Press the Maintenance button repeatedly until d appear
134. when scanning printed materials e Fading Correction Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors This setting is None by default e None Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 507 of 678 pages Fading correction will not be applied e Low Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast This can affect the tone of the image P important You can set Fading Correction after preview Fading Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box e Grain Correction Use this function to reduce graininess roughness in photos taken with high speed or sensitized film This setting is None by default e None Graininess will not be reduced e Low Select this when the photo is slightly grainy e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this when the photo is very grainy This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the image P important Grain Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small e Backlight Correction Us
135. with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Advanced Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode output resolution image brightness and color tone This section describes the settings and functions available in Advanced Mode Baddght Correction i Gutter Dador Conrecton Nore on OF Nore None Nore None None ojama ee lj omo il Preferences e 1 Settings and Operation Buttons 2 Toolbar 3 Preview Area Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened Settings and Operation Buttons e Favorite Settings You can name and save a group of settings Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings and Color Adjustment Buttons on Advanced Mode tab and load it as required It is convenient to save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly You can also use this to reload the default settings Select Add Delete from the pull down menu and the Add Delete Favorite Settings dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab Page 495 of 678 pages Add Delete Favorite Settings Setting Name Favorite Settings List New Setting Enter Setting Name and click Add The name appears in Favorite Settings List When you click Save the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected along with
136. with Vivid Colors gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration s gt Reducing Photo Noise Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 260 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning method The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the print quality Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab and click Set The Custom dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 261 of 678 pages Qusity 3 Setting the print quality and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK ES Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color
137. you want to adjust from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Adjust gt Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level The following adjustments are available Brightness Contrast Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 169 of 678 pages Sharpness Blur Show through Removal Showtheqagh Rersoval EA Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save adjusted images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for adjusted images 6 Click Exit P important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 170 of 678 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Correct Enhance Images Window Easy PhotoPrint EX Correct Enhance Images Window You can correct enhance images in this window To display the Correct Enhance Images wi
138. 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load A4 plain paper 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Specify the page size 1 Select Page Setup on the File menu in your software application The Page Setup dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your machine s name is selected in Format for 3 Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size Here we select A4 4 Click OK 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Select Print on the File menu in your software application The Print dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your machine s name is selected in Printer 3 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu 4 Select the media type of the loaded paper in Media Type Here we select Plain Paper Note if you select the wrong media type the machine may not print with the proper print quality Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Macintosh Page 36 of 678 pages 5 Select the print quality in Print Quality Here we select Standard E8 Note For details on the print quality refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Premera Starehond gI asar a voaa at 3 4 Pager Source Rear Tray a Print Qeabty C Higt Starcurd 5
139. 2 20 Note Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value If it is not written in the manual contact the manufacturer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Page 522 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting the cropping frame scan area gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Selecting the best resolution gt Resolution Learning about file formats File Formats Learning about Color Matching gt Color Matching Matching the colors between the document and monitor See Monitor Gamma in the following section Color Settings Tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 523 of 678 pages Nelieilesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Adjusting Cropping Frames You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area of the ScanGear scanner driver screen When you click Scan only the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned and passed to the application Cropping Frame Types 1 1 Focus Cropping Frame rotating thick broken lines Th
140. 2 of 678 pages The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the g Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E9 Note a You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 163 of 678 pages Nelifiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears RedEye Conecton TT gt 22 Face Shapenet 2S Diza Face Smocthing Ea CA Ut
141. 22 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear Check 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a hub remove it from the hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer Check 4 Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed If it is not installed insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers Check 5 On the File menu of the application select Select Source and select the machine EA Note The operation may differ depending on the application Check 6 Make sure that the application is TWAIN compliant You cannot open ScanGear scanner driver from applications not supporting TWAIN Check 7 Exit ScanGear scanner driver if it is running on another application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Page 623 of 678 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Check 1 Increase the scanning resolution gt Resolution C
142. 5cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select a layout of the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you wart lo pent Check the Preview aed cick the Print taiton Piring tarts S amp Rneeie E Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example ID Photo 3 5x4 5cm 135 2 4 6 a You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click Settings or select Preferences from the File menu ID photos can only be printed on 4 x6 10x15cm paper Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 191 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photo Information Page 192 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Photo Information ae Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Printing Photo Information You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side To print them select Letter 8 5 x11 or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select Captured Info from the layouts in the Layout Print
143. 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Preview Tab Preview Tab On the Preview tab you can specify the following settings Scanner Preview Scan Color Settings Preview at Start of ScarGear Automatically Execute Previews Deplay Saved Preview Image J Nene Cropping Frame on Previewed Images Execute Auto Cropping oe Previmwed lenges Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images None Cropping Sine for Thumeal View 9 Standerd e Preview at Start of ScanGear Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear scanner driver is started Display Saved Preview Image is selected by default e Automatically Execute Preview ScanGear scanner driver will automatically start previewing at startup e Display Saved Preview Image The previously previewed image will be displayed The Color Adjustment Button settings the Toolbar settings and the Advanced Mode tab settings are also saved e None No preview image will be displayed at startup EA Note Select None if you do not want to save the preview image e Cropping Frame on Previewed Images Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images is selected by default e Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images The cropping frame will automatically be displayed in the document size after pre
144. 7 of 678 pages How Can Move or Copy the Saved File What Is C1 or C4 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 118 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Rem you wang to create from the manu Selact LOreey to access saved rems Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 119 of 678 pages WelFisesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Album from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Specty abun structure paper Sze etc in General Settings then select a theme Cick the buttons at the bottom of the screen to specty tryout and background After spectying pacer sae etc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Ste M Doub page abum Onentaton Potrat L Page number Front amp Back Front Cover Back Cover
145. 70 Printing T casck Senp Man 3 Page Setup af Efects A Martenance Yid Photo al Phgte Optimizer PRO Photo Noise Reductor Pian Paper Leter 85x11 215 5 273 4mm 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with a single color P important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Monochrome Effects appears Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 283 of 678 pages grayed out and is unavailable Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Page 284 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human skin color natural By using this function you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Vivi
146. 8 50 Hogt 11 09 inches 1 00 11 69 Unts e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents Resolution e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals OCR Dialog Box Page 437 of 678 pages settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear scanner driver screen Specify Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box ES Note When scanning slanted documents select the Correct slanted document checkbox to improve the text recognition accuracy Save Settings File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP P important You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vi
147. Adjusting Cropping Frames for details on cropping frames Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified on the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab al Switch Aspect Ratio Click this button to rotate the cropping frame Click again to return it to the original orientation e Data Size An image file is created when the preview image is scanned Its size when saved in BMP format is displayed Note When the file size exceeds a certain size the value appears in red In that case a warning Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Output Settings Page 504 of 678 pages message appears when you click Scan It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce Data Size To continue scan in whole image view Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 505 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Image Settings ScanGear Image Settings Favonte Settings Select Source Pacer Sre 1 Color Mode 5 10 Ove Ste Ato ou FF Nowe nore Nre tore Nre Gmer Dador Correction 1 enig ee a Co i en ne Ji Preferences ese j P important Do not apply these functions to images without moire dust s
148. Box Page 393 of 678 pages Nelieiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt PDF Settings Dialog Box PDF Settings Dialog Box In the PDF Settings dialog box you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files PoF Sening o J Enable keyword gearch Document Language Detect the otertation of bet documents and rotate mages Conect darted doourert POF Compression Sanded High Secu NeSeowty ooo o o Ca cance e Enable keyword search Select this checkbox to convert characters in a document to text data This will enable an easy search by keyword e Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned e Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation P important This function may not work properly depending on the document language Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or
149. Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes e Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults e Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings When Save as type is Auto a confirmation appears Click Open Manual to open this guide if it is installed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preferences Dialog Box Page 443 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Preferences Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions via the General and Scanner Button Settings tabs General Scanner Button Sezngal gt Speoty MP Navigator EX settings Product pame MP270 senes gt Save in My Box CAUsers Userttsme Pictures MP Navigator EX Browse Location of Tonporiry Fies C Users Userttsme Pictures MP Navigator EX Geptcaton to run Part Photo Easy PhotoPart EX Pant Album Easy PhatoPart EX Conven to tet He Netepad ss Aho Gann None Atach Manusi z Open POF fie XXXX C a H Note See the corresponding sections below for details on each tab s gt General Tab gt Scanner Button Settings Tab Save Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Tab Page 444 of 678 pages
150. Canon MP270 series MP250 series On screen Manual Page 1 of 678 pages How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual MP270 series MP250 series On screen Manual MC 3752 V1 00 i gt Mee ey m Tl aa a Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Describes the summary of Describes the detailed this product function of this product Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 MP250 series Basic Guide Page 2 of 678 pages Canon MP270 MP250 series se es WHow to Use This Manual Basic Guide WPrinting This Manual MP 3273 V1 00 3 MlAdvanced Guide F Contents gt Overview of the Machine gt Loading Paper Originals Main Components Loading Paper LED Display and Basic Operations Loading Originals Copying gt Routine Maintenance Copying Documents When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Copying Photos Incorrect Fit to Page Copying Replacing a FINE Cartridge Cleaning the Machine Scanning gt Appendix Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Printing from Your Computer Tips on How to Use Your Machine Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Macintosh Other Usages Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Useful Software Applications Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Overview of the Machine Page 3 of 678 pages
151. Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Attaching Comments to Photos F Show line V Show capture date E Fort Sty Bod tate Center Postion Size From Left of Page 6 27 inches Width 1 65 inches From Top of Page 2 49 inches Height 1 65 inches Select the Show comment box checkbox Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display and enter comments Set the size and color of font and position of the comments etc then click OK Note See Help for details on comments Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals fasie Taje 609 Page 212 of 678 pages Adding Text to Photos Page 213 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Text to Photos ES Easy PhotoPrint EX E Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos Click Al Add Text in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text E Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Est TetBbo S Tet Poston amp Size Color amp Lnes Anony of aree Ede abun zs reed Create Album fort foal tai OoOo M SPON Til news EC pe ME nn aom aag yart apen z ire Spacing Hapa Select Ima
152. Correct Enhance Images Window Custom Scan with One click Tab One click Mode Screen m Auto Scan Dialog Box Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen PDF Dialog Box Mail Dialog Box gt OCR Dialog Box s gt Custom Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box s gt General Tab Scanner Button Settings Tab Save Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Navigation Mode Screen Page 377 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Navigation Mode Screen MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode Screen This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX Point to the icon at the top of the screen to display each tab Use each tab depending on what you want to do Scan Import Documents or Images amp S Photos Documents Platen SS eno E Show fit window of tatu T Proterences _ 2 e Scan Import Scan Photos and Documents s gt Scan Import Documents or Images Tab e View amp Use You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e mail You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab e One click You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon Custom Scan with One click Tab gt PER Mode Switches to One click Mode screen In t
153. Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 582 of 678 pages Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Print to End of Job Page 583 of 678 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Cannot Print to End of Job Cannot Print to End of Job e Check 1 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 2 Is the space of your computer s hard disk sufficient Delete unnecessary files to free disk space Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 584 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks gt No Printing Results gt Printing Is Blurred ABCD Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are W
154. Drag the mage to rearrange the fies Berane mG Save in C Users UserNaene WPich ses MP Navigator EX 2009_0 Browse MW Save to a Subloider wth Qurert Date seve Conca e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif TIFF BMP PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file EA Note PDF Multiple Pages is displayed when multiple images are scanned e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well If apassword protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords Setting Passwords for PDF Files Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box Page 426 of 678 pages P important PDF PDF Multiple Pages and PDF Add Page cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White e Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Co
155. EG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009 _01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 391 of 678 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save as PDF file Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box In the Save as PDF file dialog box you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF files You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP Navigator EX P important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions Dialog box that opens when Save as PDF file in the Scan Import window is clicked Y Seve the mage to the speotied folder as a PDF fle Save as type POFDAstiple Poses Se Password securty settings You can save mutiple mages to one PDF He Ble name ra Swen C Users WinerNaeto Pict res MP Navigator EX 2003_0 Browse E7 Save to a Subloider wth Qurert Date gre cance
156. EX Clear Jamo to Main Meru 13 Save the scanned images Saving Saving as PDF Files Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cick to select the imaga IT Preferences aug To Page top Page 335 of 678 pages Easy Scanning with One click Page 336 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Easy Scanning with One click MP Navigator EX Easy Scanning with One click You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Start MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One click Mode screen appears Navigation Mode Screen Scan Import Documents or Images B Photos Documents Platen af e E Show ti window of status 41 Proterences One click Mode Screen ft Preterences Note Skip ahead to Step 4 if One click Mode screen is open 3 Point to One click Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Easy Scanning with One click Page 337 of 678 pages cas Sove os POF So t Atoch to E snil O Stat seaming by clicking the buton leno E Show this window af itatup 4 Click the corresponding icon Custom Scan with One click Tab s gt One click Mode Scr
157. EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file el4 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Page 108 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts You can also create borderless photos easily Corrections suitable for photos will be applied automatically when printing Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting a Photo 3 Selecting the Paper 4 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s Printing Vivid Photos s gt Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print s gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print s Printing Photo Information s gt Saving Photos b Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File s Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from How Do Print with Even Margins Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Page 109 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 110 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide
158. Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Apply optimum corrections automatically to the photos used for an album calendar etc P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing by selecting Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix Also Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application digital camera etc manufactured by other companies 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears SE Auto Photo Fix fet RedEye Conection 22 Face Shapenet os Diza Face Soothing En CA Users User Name IMGOXS sjpg EA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced
159. If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace the FINE Cartridge ES Note Printed colors may not match screen colors due to basic differences in the methods used to Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Colors Are Unclear Page 588 of 678 pages produce colors Color control settings and environmental differences can also affect how colors appear on the screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Lines Are Misaligned Page 589 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Lines Are Misaligned Lines Are Misaligned e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform Print Head Alignment If you did not align the Print Head after installation straight lines may be printed misaligned s gt Aligning the Print Head ES Note Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position Windows e Check 3 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data
160. Images It may be unlawful to make copies of scan print or use reproductions of the following documents The list provided is non exhaustive When in doubt check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction Paper money Traveler s checks Money orders Food stamps Certificates of deposit Passports Postage stamps canceled or Immigration papers uncanceled Internal revenue stamps canceled or Identifying badges or insignias uncanceled Selective service or draft papers Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Checks or drafts issued by Stock certificates governmental agencies Copyrighted works works of art without Motor vehicle licenses and permission of copyright owner certificates of title O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 79 of 678 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Appendix gt Tips on How to Use Your Machine Tips on How to Use Your Machine This section introduces the tips on how to use your machine and for printing with optimal quality m Ink is used for various purposes How is ink used for various purposes other than printing Ink may be used for purposes other than printing Ink is not only used for printing but also for cleaning the Print Head to maintain the optimal printing quality The machine has the function to automatically clean the ink jet nozzles to prevent clogging In the cleaning procedur
161. Incorrect 9 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 83 of 678 pages MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide gt MC 3791 V1 00 ae i a 5 s Pa q Basic Guide Printing Copying Printing with the Bundled Application Software What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX roubleshooting Printing Photos Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX How to Use This Manual Selecting a Photo Printing This Manual Selecting the Paper Creating an Album Changing the Machine Settings Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting a Photo When you display this on screen manual in a language Editing environment other than English Printing some English descriptions may Printing Calendars be displayed Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Stickers Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Layout Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function Using the Face Brightener Function Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 84 of 678 pages Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Blemish Remov
162. Library from Menu Seber the kam you want to create from the many Select LOreey to access saved Roms gt amp Photo Print gt se gt gt Ee a Stickers The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX by icon view only for Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Layout Print screen appears ES Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format extension Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 3 Edit the file if necessary E Note You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Double click or click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 195 of 678 pages You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Other Settings Page 196 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings Other Settings s gt Changing Layout s gt Changing Background m Adding Photos gt
163. MP Drivers restart your computer and then reinstall the MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 579 of 678 pages If you reinstall the MP Drivers perform Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM then select MP Drivers Windows ES Note If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers Restart your computer before reinstalling Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Page 580 of 678 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work This device can perform faster Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi Speed USB the machine will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1 1 In this case the machine operates properly but printing speed may slow down due to communication speed e Check Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi Speed USB connection e Does the USB port on your computer support Hi Speed USB connection e Do the USB cable and the USB hub if you are using one support Hi Speed USB connection Be sure to use a certified Hi Spee
164. MP Navigator EX Screens gt Mail Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Mail Dialog Box Click Attach to E mail on the Custom Scan with One click tab or click Mail in the One click Mode screen to open the Mail dialog box L Scan photos or documents and send then vis enal Sean Settings Document Tree ame O gt Color Modo Color z Documegt Sze Letter Resokgon 3p E Use the scanner dryer L Sot Save Settings fie Sze Medum fits in a 00 by 600 window Fe namne CG Save os hpa ecset tn Saven CAlsens serName Pictes MP Navigate Browse 7 Sawe to a Sutloider mth Curent Date Meachesort Settings Mai Progam Nene Attach Marusiy z El Rat scanning by clicking the one click button r C Cn Ds osm Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK 850 inches 1 09850 P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
165. Multiple Documents at One Time Page 328 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time MP Navigator EX Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time You can scan two or more photos small documents at one time by setting Document Size to Auto Detect Multiple Documents in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX P important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case start ScanGear scanner driver then adjust the cropping frames Scan areas in whole image view and scan again Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 3 Point to Scan Import and click Photos Documents Platen View amp Use Scan Import Documents or Images gt Photos Documents Platen S en E Show hi window of tarup tT Prejacancesa l 4 Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Page 329 of 678 pages Folow the procedure below to scan photos o docum
166. N jeg Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer s gt Opening Images Saved on a Computer Correcting Photo Images You can correct enhance images in the Correct Enhance Images window 1 Select images and click Edit Convert 2 Click Fix photo images on the list The Correct Enhance Images window opens 3 Correct enhance images in the Correct Enhance Images window Note See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window See the corresponding sections below for correcting enhancing images gt Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically gt Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Files Page 369 of 678 pages Converting Documents to Text Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad included with Windows P important PDF files cannot be converted to text 1 Select images and click Edit Convert 2 Click Convert to text file on the list Notepad included with Windows starts and editable text appears ES Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad included with Windows Click Set on the General tab and specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned When scanning multiple documents you can collect the extracted t
167. Options dialog box e Page Layout Poster Booklet Duplex Printing Specify Margin Print from Last Page Collate and Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab e Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result e With some applications the printing is divided into multiple print jobs To cancel printing delete all divided print jobs e f image data is not printed correctly display the Print Options dialog box and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software This may solve the problem e Software windows may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when fonts are set to Larger scale When you want to display the windows with Larger scale fonts set the desktop theme to Windows Classic as follows 1 Select Control Panel from the Start menu 2 Select Appearance and Personalization gt Personalization gt Theme The Theme Settings dialog box opens 3 At the Theme Settings dialog box click the Themes tab and select Windows Classic from Theme 4 Click OK Desktop changes to Windows Classic display Points to Note with Applications e There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word Microsoft Corporation e When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver use Word to specify them e When selecting Scaled Fit to Page or Page Layout from the Pag
168. Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers The Printers window Windows Vista Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes window Windows XP is displayed 3 Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared e In Windows Vista press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as administrator gt Sharing from the displayed File menu e In Windows XP or Windows 2000 select Sharing from the File menu P important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning E8 Note Windows XP may display a message recommending the user to use the Network Setup Wizard to set up sharing When this message appears choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing 4 Set sharing Select Share this printer Windows Vista Windows XP or Shared as Windows 2000 on the Sharing tab to set a shared name if necessary and click OK The setup on the print server system is complete Next set up the client systems O Page top
169. PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can save scanned data to PC using the Operation Panel of the machine Before saving scanned data to PC confirm the following o The necessary application software MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX are installed If the application software MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX are not yet installed insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX The machine is connected to a computer correctly Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly Do not plug or unplug the USB cable when scanning images with the machine or when the computer is in the sleep or standby mode The operation after scanning the original is specified in MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX enables you to specify the response resulting from pressing the SCAN button on the machine You can specify the response individually for each event For details refer to Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Set the starting application If you are using Mac OS X v 10 5 x or Mac OS X v 10 4 x This operation is not necessary If you are using Mac OS X v 10 3 9 You need to set MP Navigator EX as the starting application software in Image Capture under Applications of Mac OS X Select Applications on the Go menu t
170. Photo Paper Here we load 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Load a photo on the Platen Glass See Loading Originals 2 Start copying 1 Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies See step 2 in Copying Documents 2 Press the Paper button repeatedly to select the page size and media type The Paper lamp indicates the selected page size and media type Here we select 10 x 15 cm or 4 x 6 Photo Paper E8 Note You can select the following page sizes and media types A4 or 8 5 x 11 Plain Paper A4 or 8 5 x 11 Photo Paper 10x 15 cm or 4 x 6 Photo Paper Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 17 of 678 pages Copying Photos You can switch the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel See Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter When the Fit to Page copy function is enabled you can copy the original in the size automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size In this case the original is copied with borders on the plain paper and without borders on the photo paper Cancel the Fit to Page copy function to copy the original in the same size See Fit to Page Copying 3 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machin
171. Placing Documents 2 Placing Documents appears e View scanned images Select this checkbox to display the thumbnails of scanned images in a different window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Mode Tab Page 513 of 678 pages e Scan Scanning starts E8 Note When scanning starts the progress will be displayed Click Cancel to cancel the scan When scanning is completed a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open Follow the prompt to complete For details see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in Scan Tab Preferences dialog box e Instructions 2 This page appears e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan preview settings Preferences Dialog Box e Close Closes ScanGear scanner driver Related Topic gt Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preferences Dialog Box Page 514 of 678 pages WelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Preferences Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences in the ScanGear scanner driver screen to open Preferences dialog box In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to ScanGear scanner driver functions via the Scanner Preview Scan and Color Settings tabs Scorer Preview Scan_ Color Settings
172. Platen e E Show this window of statu 11 Preterences IEA Note a Alternatively from the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt MP Navigator EX 3 0 gt MP Navigator EX 3 0 Starting One click Mode 1 Click p Switch Mode at the bottom left of the screen j Viow amp Use Scan Import Documents or Images S Photos Documents Platen fT Preterences IEA The One click Mode screen appears Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting MP Navigator EX Page 324 of 678 pages f Preferences Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open the Navigation Mode screen at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears at startup Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Photos and Documents Page 325 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Scanning Photos and Documents MP Navigator EX Scanning Photos and Documents Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 2 Point to Scan Import and click Photos Documents Platen Scan Import Documents or Images lt gt Photos Documents Platen 3 147 Preterences i 3 Place the document o
173. Recommended X Co c Conte tee 3 Change the individual settings If necessary change the setting of each item and then click OK The Page Setup tab is displayed again Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 562 of 678 pages Niles Gutels Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows Registering a Printing Profile 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the necessary items From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select the printing profile to be used and if necessary change the settings after Additional Features You can also set necessary items on the Main Page Setup and Effects tab 3 Click Save FR cack Senp E Main 23 Page Setup gh Btects Af Martenance Commorty Used Settings Er EA Prete Prrerg E T Business Document D7 Paper Saving 5 Aan E ON Addbonal Features Zone Prrtng ia deml Printing Borderiess Parting E Duplex Prrting El Grayscale Porting Prt fron Last Page Fat Speed Preety
174. Reduced on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Does Not Open Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Page 632 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems gt E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Program E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Program Check 1 MP Navigator EX may not support the e mail software program The following e mail software programs are supported Image are attached to the mail message automatically Windows Mail Windows Vista Outlook Express Windows XP Windows 2000 Microsoft Outlook Check 2 If an e mail software program does not operate properly check that the program s MAPI is enabled To enable MAPI refer to the manual of the e mail software program Check 3 If using an e mail software program other than the ones listed above select None Attach Manually when prompted to select a program and attach the scanned image manually Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced Page 633 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems gt Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Red
175. Save as type and then select this checkbox a message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto Save Settings e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif TIFF BMP or PDF P important When Save as type is Auto the file format may differ depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents Large documents such as A4 size photos that cannot be placed away from the edges arrow alignment mark of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is Auto In that case select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned Images cannot be added to password protected PDF files ES Note When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards CD DVD and business cards JPEG Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change the file format from Set e Set When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images Select a file format for Document and Photo each When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF Make advanced se
176. Scanning with WIA Driver Page 531 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Other Scanning Methods gt Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning with WIA Driver You can scan an image from a WIA compliant application and use the image in that application The procedure varies depending on the application The following procedures are examples only For details refer to the application s manual P important In Windows 2000 you cannot scan using the WIA driver Scanning with WIA Driver 2 0 The following is an example of scanning using Windows Photo Gallery 1 Place the document on the Platen s gt Placing Documents 2 In File click Import from Camera or Scanner then double click WIA Canon model name The scan setting screen appears 3 Specify the settings New Sean Scenven WIA Canan MPI ser C Chage Prerije Photo Detaat Sarte Fises Pepy ate Caler format Cere Bie type PG UPES imaeh z Besobstion DPD x0 Brightress 2 Sortrast Q b 2 Preview or scan images a3 separate files re Bein sean coce e Scanner The currently set product name is displayed To change the scanner click Change and select the product you want to use e Profile Select Photo Default or Documents according to the document to be scanned To save a new Profile select Add profile You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box e Source Select a scann
177. Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the Save dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear scanner driver screen e Specify Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The File name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed P important If you select this function you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode When saving as PDF files select PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page P important When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto the file format may differ depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents Large documents such as A4 size photos that cannot be placed away from the edges arrow alignment mark of the Platen may not be saved in the correct
178. Sound When Scanning is Completed Calix atten Settings Eweoute at Every Scan F p e Quiet Mode Select this checkbox to reduce scanner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or scanning documents This checkbox is not selected by default E8 Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function e Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily To change the folder click Browse to specify another one e Sound Settings You can set the machine to play music during at the end of a scan Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox then click Browse and specify a sound file You can specify the following files MIDI file mid rmi midi Audio file wav aif aiff MP3 file mp3 e Calibration Settings When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing and scanning to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images EA Note Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF the scanner may be calibrated automatically in some cases such as immediately after you turn the machine on Calibration may take time depending on your computer Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Tab Page 516 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preview Tab Page 517 of
179. The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones Diffusion places the dots randomly to express the halftones When you select Auto the data is printed with the optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified quality level and halftoning method P important Certain print quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type ES Note 1 When the part of the object is not printed selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 262 of 678 pages Adna tiffs Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2
180. Use Auto Scan Mode to scan easily by simply placing the document on the Platen and clicking Scan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top Page 454 of 678 pages Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 455 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver Starting ScanGear scanner driver s gt Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning documents after making simple image corrections s gt Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and brightness color adjustments s gt Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning with a simple operation s gt Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning multiple documents at one time after making image corrections and color adjustments s gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 456 of 678 pages WelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Use ScanGear scanner driver to make image corrections and co
181. When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the printer paper size is larger than the page size the page image will be enlarged Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scaled Printing e Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box Osh Canca MP2 0 se aj nt pen ad a TR Qk Senp Main B Page Setup of Etects Aj Martenance El Page Sze Lotier 35x117 E amp Onertation A 5 Pora fa Langcape Fetme 180 degrees BB Prea Pacer Sze Letter 85x10 gt Page Layout Scaled Cre Scaling iH zgo Duplex Parting Long ade stag ah Specty Margn Lopes gt 0 995 ey ae Pact Ostona Samo tecgorund Odnas Co Eaa C E The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the specified scale P important When the application software with which you created the original has the scaled printing function configure the settings on your application software You do not need to configure the same setting in the printer driver When Scaled is selected the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable when Duplex Printing is not selected Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma
182. You can also enter a value 5 to 250 The point clicked with Z White point Dropper will be the brightest point You can also enter a value 10 to 255 Click image Dropper for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference and the rest of the image is adjusted accordingly For instance if snow in a photo appears bluish click the bluish part to adjust the whole image and reproduce natural colors Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Tone Curve Page 482 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Tone Curve Adjusting Tone Curve In ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab click Tone Curve Settings lejl az Custom z a Defa ES Note a Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red Green and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel e Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined e Red Adjust the Red channel e Green Adjust the Green channel e Blue Adjust the Blue channel ES Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale Reading Tone Curves
183. You can print dates on images Select the image you want to print the date in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box fomeomecmecmecmnce fShow date Select the Show date checkbox Set the Text Orientation Position Font Size and Color then click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed images Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Dates on Photos Page 210 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 211 of 678 pages Attaching Comments to Photos Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Attaching Comments to Photos gil H Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Attaching Comments to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your album The photo name shooting date and comments are displayed from top to bottom in a comment box A memory of summer 09 20 08 Family playing with sa nd P important You cannot attach comments to Photo Print Calendar Stickers and Layout Print Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the
184. a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 450 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images gt Opening Images Saved on a Computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e mail using MP Navigator EX You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 2 In the Navigation Mode screen point to View amp Use and click My Box Scanned Imported Images Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images Click My Box Scanned Imported Images to open images saved in My Box Scanned Imported Images click Specify Folder to open images saved in a specific folder or click Recently Saved Images to open recently saved images My Box Scanned Imported Images en E Show this window af itatup E8 Note If the Show this window at startup checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears If the Scan Import window is displayed click View amp Use on the upper left of the screen The View amp Use window opens See View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab for details on the View amp Use Images on your Computer tab 3 Click the folder cont
185. ab s gt Scanning in Basic Mode s gt Scanning in Advanced Mode 1 Place the document on the Platen then start ScanGear scanner driver gt Placing Documents Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 2 Click Auto Scan Mode The Auto Scan Mode tab appears ee ron a ere Pisce paper and press Scan button Bla 3 Click Scan Scanning starts E8 Note ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box gt Scan Tab Related Topic Auto Scan Mode Tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 464 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 465 of 678 pages Nelieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver You can scan two or more photos small documents on the Platen at one time in Basic Mode and Advanced Mode of ScanGear scanner driver This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab P important Toscan multiple documents as a single image scan in whole image view
186. age 666 of 678 pages In Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 1 Select Applications on the Go menu 2 Double click the Utilities folder and then double click the Printer Setup Utility icon The Printer List opens 3 Select your machine s name in the Name list and click Utility e608 Printer List 5 SO Make Default MP270 series Canon MP270 series 4 Select your machine s name in the Product list and click Maintenance ean Printer List USB product Tye MP270 series Canon Printer a J enas maintenance 3 The Canon lJ Printer Utility starts up Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Sharing the Printer on a Network Page 667 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network Sharing the Printer on a Network When multiple computers are being used in the network environment you can share the printer connected to one computer with the other computers The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same a N C LA Cent PC Client PC Client PC e Settings on Print Server The procedure for setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable is as follows e Settings on Client PC The procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network is as follows When you execute print the data is sent through the print server syste
187. ages ASAI AT Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only s gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only s gt About PictBridge Print Settings MP270 series only Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Page 538 of 678 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only You can connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera camcorder or mobile phone connect to the machine using a USB cable recommended by the device s manufacturer and print recorded images directly without using a computer EA Note a When printing photos with the PictBridge compliant device connected to the machine we recommend the use of the AC adapter supplied with the device If you are using the device battery be sure to charge it fully a Depending on the model or brand of your device you may have to select a print mode com
188. aining the images you want to open Images saved in the folder appear in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 451 of 678 pages Dea v Decumert Imeges0 b Burress Cond Imoges 0 Setections 4 Select the images you want to use then select what you want to do with them See the corresponding sections below for details on using images s gt Creating Editing PDF Files gt Printing Documents s gt Printing Photos s gt Sending via E mail Editing Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with Other Application Software Page 452 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software Scanning with Other Application Software s gt What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver s gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver s gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens Appendix Useful Information on Scanning Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver Page 453 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver ScanGear scanner driver is software required for scanning documents It enabl
189. akes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected Deleting Cropping Frames In thumbnail view To delete a cropping frame click an area outside the cropping frame on an image In whole image view To delete a cropping frame select it and click Sone Remove Cropping Frame on the Toolbar Alternatively press the Delete key When there are multiple cropping frames all the selected cropping frames Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are deleted simultaneously Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Resolution Page 526 of 678 pages Nelifilesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt Resolution Resolution What is Resolution The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color The density of these dots is called resolution and resolution will determine the amount of detail your image contains The unit of resolution is dots per inch dpi Dpi is the number of dots per square inch 2 54 cm square The higher the resolution value the more detail in your image the lower the resolution value the less detail FF Setting the Resolution in MP Navigator EX In MP Navigator EX you can specify the resolution with Scanning Resolution in the Scan Settings dialog box Images for Printing Images to be printed sho
190. als Transporting the Machine s Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows s Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Sharing the Printer on a Network Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Area Page 648 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area Printing Area To ensure the best print quality the machine allows a margin along each edge of media The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins Recommended printing area HM Canon recommends that you print within this area Printable area L The area where it is possible to print However printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision ES Note Borderless Printing e e J By selecting Borderless Printing option you can make prints with no margins When performing Borderless Printing slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed image is enlarged to fill the whole page For Borderless Printing use the following paper e Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi Gloss SG 201 Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT 101 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 Photo Paper Pro II PR 201 Matte Photo Paper MP 101 For MP270 series this paper can be used only when printing from your computer Performing Borderless Printing on any
191. alsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 146 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Layout Print from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty paper sze etc m General Settings then select a byout After spectying paper sae atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Ste 47x67 10xiSen x Eert date Orentaton A Portrat AJ tandscape MEE ZASS 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings 3 Select a layout from Layouts EA Note The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation ES Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 147 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Sele
192. and P and number error code are alternately displayed on the LED an error requiring servicing might have occurred Error Code P 0 2 jam the Cancel printing turn off the machine Then clear the med paper or protective material that is preventing FINE Cartridge Holder from moving and turn on the machine again P important Pan Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine The machine may not print out properly if you touch it If the problem is not resolved contact the service center depends on the error occurred P 1 0 is displayed Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Contact the service center P 0 3 is displayed If any object is placed in front of the machine remove it Open the Paper Output Tray gently then turn the power off and back on In other cases Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Page 575 of 678 pages If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals LED Cannot Be Seen At All Page 576 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt LED Cannot Be Seen At All LED Cannot Be Seen At All e If the Power lamp is
193. and Scratches Fading Correc Page 472 of 678 pages Reducing graininess Set Grain Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of graininess Correcting backlit images Set Backlight Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of backlight Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of shadows Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 473 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern ScanGear Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the Color Pattern function in ScanGear s Basic Mode tab TEET Color Adjustment Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color Cyan amp red magenta amp green and yellow amp blue are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by red
194. and remove the orange protective tape D gently D gt Important if you shake a FINE Cartridge ink may spill out and stain your hands and the surrounding area Handle a FINE Cartridge carefully Be careful not to stain your hands and the surrounding area with ink on the removed protective tape Do not reattach the protective tape once you have removed it Discard it according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables Do not touch the electrical contacts or print head nozzles on a FINE Cartridge The machine may not print properly if you touch it 5 Install the FINE Cartridge 1 Put a new FINE Cartridge in the FINE Cartridge Holder The Color FINE Cartridge should be installed into the left slot and the Black FINE Cartridge should be installed into the right slot 2 Close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover to lock the FINE Cartridge into place Push down the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks E8 Note If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed correctly push down the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 69 of 678 pages E Closed correctly F Not closed correctly the cover is tilted gt Important The machine cannot print unless both the Color and Black FINE Cartridges are installed Be sure to install both the FINE Cartridges 6 Lift the Scanning Unit Cov
195. ange the color balance significantly Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform No adjustment Adjust Color Balance The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust color balance There are individual sliders for Cyan Magenta and Yellow Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Color Balance Page 274 of 678 pages moved to the left For example when cyan becomes weaker the color red becomes stronger You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK ABCDEF a 1234567 Sample Type View Cole Patton P important Adjust the slider gradual
196. anned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Attachment Settings e Mail Program Specify an e mail software program Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Mail Dialog Box Page 435 of 678 pages Select Add to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e mail software program If the e mail software program you want to use is not listed click Add to List and select it Select Mail Program Select a mai program from the kst Nore Geach Monat Addo lat Ox Cancel _ e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon e Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings e Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes e Defaults Returns all s
197. anner driver checkbox in Scan Settings then click Scan Save Settings D Atomaticaly save the mage to your computer afer scanning File rane mS Sae ss tpe C 8 Swen CAlkeesserNarno Pierres MP Navigate Browse F Sarre to a Subfolder wth Curent Date EG Ed fle in Adobe RGE Open the sare dialog bax after scanning the mage nout Ed information Sephcation Settings Open wth None Open the view amp Use dialog box L Soi scanning by chcking the ome chck button fool afer anced ah inis e The ScanGear scanner driver screen appears P important Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the PDF dialog box or Auto Scan dialog box Starting from an Application Follow these steps example to start ScanGear scanner driver from an application The procedure varies depending on the application For details refer to the application s manual 1 Start the application 2 On the File menu of the application select Select Source and select the machine 3 Select the command to scan a document Scan Import Acquire image etc The ScanGear scanner driver screen appears Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 457 of 678 pages Scanning in Basic Mode Page 458 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning
198. ans GS vcrsrecesecctie OD rwahrecn te EA Note The Face Brightener Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 6 Drag to select the area you want to correct enhance then click OK that appears over the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Page 344 of 678 pages The portion in and around the selected area is corrected enhanced and d Correct Enhance appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image E8 Note You can also drag to rotate the rectangle Click Undo to undo the latest correction enhancement Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image 7 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected enhanced images as new files EA Note To save only the images you like select them and click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images The file format of corrected enhanced images is JPEG Exif 8 Click Exit P important The corrections enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Images Page 345 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide
199. anual Advanced Guide to change the settings in Document Type and Document Size of MP Navigator EX to match the original and scan it When you are using Windows Vista The program selection screen may appear after performing step 2 In this case select MP Navigator EX Ver3 0 and click OK When you are using Windows XP The program selection screen may appear after performing step 2 for the first time In this case specify MP Navigator EX Ver3 0 as the application software to be used select Always use this program for this action then click OK From the next time MP Navigator EX will be automatically started A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing from Your Computer Page 24 of 678 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Printing from Your Computer Printing from Your Computer This section describes how to print photos or documents with a computer You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Macintosh For Mac OS X v 10 5 x For Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 25 of 678 pages bie Guide E E Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX
200. anuals Custom Scan with One click Tab Page 381 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Custom Scan with One click Tab Custom Scan with One click Tab Point to One click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One click tab You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon Attach to E snil O Stat scanning by clicking the buton o gt E Show fit window a tatup e Auto Scan Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type File format is automatically set Files are saved to a computer You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required When you click this icon the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings Auto Scan Dialog Box e Save to PC Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer The document type can be detected automatically When you click this icon the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save settings Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen e Save as PDF file Scan documents and save them as PDF files When you click this icon the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and application settings PDF Dialog Box e Attach to E mail Scan documents or photos and attach them to e mail When you click this icon the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify
201. aper load limit However proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature and humidity In such cases reduce the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit e Always load the paper in portrait orientation regardless of the printing orientation e When you load the paper on the Rear Tray load the paper with the print side facing UP and slide the Paper Guides to align with the both sides of the paper Loading Paper Originals e Check 2 Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled gt Loading Paper Originals e Check 3 Make sure of the following when you load envelopes When printing on envelopes refer to Loading Paper Originals and prepare the envelopes before printing Once you have prepared the envelopes load them in portrait orientation If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation they will not feed properly e Check 4 Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the Rear Tray If the paper tears in the Rear Tray see Paper Jams to remove it Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 606 of 678 pages If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the machine unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object Page top Downloaded
202. appears r RedEye Conection 29 Face Shxpenet os Diza Face Smocthing Ext CAUuert User Nome saeegleDl jpg E9 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Brightener Function Page 159 of 678 pages 4 Click Face Brightener Face Sharpener S Dipta Face Sancothenp Elerreth Remover E8 Note a Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener a Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area a Click Undo to undo the preceding co
203. arch for images by category e Modified Date To search for images that have been updated in a specific time period enter the first and last dates of the period e Shooting Date To search for images captured in a specific time period enter the first and last dates of the period EA Note Captured date is the date and time of data creation which are included in the document s Exif information e More Advanced Options e Aword or phrase in the file In A word or phrase in the file select the items to search If you select the Exif information Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Searching Images Page 350 of 678 pages checkbox text in Maker Model Description and User Comment is searched If you select the PDF text checkbox text in PDF files is searched P important Text in password protected PDF files cannot be searched e Search subfolders Select this checkbox to search subfolders e Case sensitive Select this checkbox to match case e Match all criteria Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria e Match any criteria Searches for files that meet any of the specified criteria e Start Search Starts search Related Topic View amp Use Window Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Classifying Images into Categories Page 351 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Function
204. arm lamp Power lamp is off The power is off Power lamp lights green The machine is ready to print Power lamp flashes green The machine is initializing or shutting down Alarm lamp lights or flashes orange An error has occurred and the machine is not ready to print For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Power lamp flashes green and Alarm lamp flashes orange alternately An error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 LED Light Emitting Diode Displays the number of copies Maintenance code or operational status such as an error code 3 button Specifies the number of copies 4 Ink lamps Light or flash orange when ink runs out etc The lamp on the left indicates the Color FINE Cartridge status and the lamp on the right indicates the Black FINE Cartridge status 5 Paper button Selects the page size and media type 6 SCAN button Starts scanning the original to save it on the computer 7 Stop Reset button Cancels operations You can also press this button to cancel a print copy or scan job in progress 8 Color button Starts color copying You can also press this button to finalize your selection for the setting item Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Main Components Page 8 of 678 pages 9 Black button Starts blac
205. arts and printed paper is ejected 7 Output Tray Extension Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Main Components Open to support the printouts Open it when printing or copying 8 Platen Glass Load an original to copy or scan 9 Direct Print Port MP270 series only Connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera to print directly See Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Warning Do not connect any equipment other than PictBridge compliant devices to the Direct Print Port of the machine This may cause fire electric shock or damage to the machine gt Important Do not touch the metal casing m Rear View 10 11 10 USB Port Plug in the USB cable to connect the machine with a computer gt Important Do not touch the metal casing Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is printing or scanning originals with the computer 11 Power Cord Connector Plug in the supplied power cord E Inside View Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 5 of 678 pages Main Components 16 15 14 12 Ink Cartridge Locking Covers Lock the FINE Cartridges into place 13 Scanning Unit Cover Scans originals Open it to replace the FINE Cartridges or remove jammed paper inside the machine When opening the Scanning Unit Cover lift it with the Document Cover closed 14 Scanning Unit Suppo
206. as needed Insert teat add mages of change layout Edit Tools Insde Pages ea ea a ea CH ES lt 7 a General Tools 4 m9 X 39 ma DER Back Cover amp a 2 Edit your album if necessary s gt Changing Layout gt Changing Background gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos gt Attaching Comments to Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited album It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 124 of 678 pages C4 Back cover gt Saving E Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 125 of 678 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Printing Printi Easy PhotoPrint EX lt amp ng 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears 2
207. assword set s Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files ve Search Enter a word or phrase included in the file name Exif information or PDF text of the image you want to search for then click A Search button For Exif information text in Maker Model Description and User Comment is searched Note Search images in My Box Scanned Imported Images Recently Saved Images or a selected folder and its subfolders G Refresh Refreshes the Thumbnail window contents a Display Size Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window 7 Categories 7 Sort by Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category date ascending or descending or name ascending or descending Images can be sorted by category only when My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed Thumbnail Window e Thumbnail Window Scanned images are displayed When you select the checkbox of an image the image appears in the Selected Images area Selecting an image and clicking the file name highlights the file name allowing you to rename it Drag and drop an image to do the following things Move from one category to another within the Thumbnail window Move to a category folder displayed in My Box Scanned Imported Images Copy to a folder displayed in Specify Folder P important In Windows 2000 Internet Explorer 5 5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open password protected PDF files You canno
208. at the center of the margin and make a booklet P important Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type When Booklet is selected Duplex Printing Staple Side Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of Booklet Printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Duplex Printing Page 243 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Duplex Printing Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab FR ask Senp E Man B Page Setup gf Elects A Martenance El Pope Sze Letter 8 5711 a Orientation a O Porat A ungcpe i a Rotate 189 degrees 3 Select the layout Select Normal size or Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list 4 Specify the side to be stapled The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best Staple Side When you want
209. ate action described in the message The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system Printing iene Printing Error Number 1000 The following paper has run out Media Type Plain Paper Paper Size A4 1 Load paper 2 Press the printer s Start button Status Name User Printing lated a 4 e In Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals If an Error Occurs Page 570 of 678 pages Error Number 1000 The following paper has run out Media Type Plain Paper Paper Size A4 1 Load paper 2 Press the printer s Start button Delete job C Stop All jobs Stops Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Page 571 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt The Machine Cannot Be Powered On The Machine Cannot Be Powered On e Check 1 Press the ON button e Check 2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the Power Cord Connector of the machine then turn it back on e Check 3 Unplug the machine from the power supply then plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 2 minute If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Page 572 of 678 pages Advanced Guide gt Tr
210. ation Print document title and page number When this check box is checked the manual name and the page number are printed in the header top of the document Print background color and images When this check box is checked the background color and the image are printed Some images are printed regardless of whether this check box is checked or not Check number of pages to be printed before printing When this check box is checked the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed before printing starts This dialog box allows you to check how many pages will be printed On the Document Selection tab select the method for printing the document The following four methods of printing are available e Print Current Document e Print Selected Documents e Print My Manual Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing This Manual e Print All Documents Note You can select the type to be printed and then easily specify print settings on the Print Setup tab Print Current Document You can print the currently displayed document From Select Target select Current Document The title of the currently displayed document is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list Note By selecting Print linked documents you can also print documents that are linked to the current document The linked documents are added to the Documents to Be Printed list Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results wi
211. ations have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive ScanGear Scanner driver can scan data that is of 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less f you change Paper Size after previewing the preview image will be deleted EA Note If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size set Paper Size to Full Platen then measure the size of the document and enter the values into amp Width and o Height e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Color Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images This mode renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of R ed G reen and B lue e Grayscale Select this mode to scan black and white photos or to create black and white images This mode Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Input Settings Page 501 of 678 pages renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of black and white e Black and White Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white This mode renders the image in black and white The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels threshold level into black and white and is rendered in two colors The threshold level can be set with A Threshold e Input Size In thumbnail view the cropped document size is displayed after preview In whole image view the Paper Size is displayed before preview and the cropping frame scan area size is displayed after preview You can adjust the cr
212. ations not supporting PDF security Files may not open if an application that can be associated with PDF files is not installed 3 Use the application to edit print the file For details refer to the application s manual P important In some applications the commands print edit etc restricted by Permissions Password may differ from those in MP Navigator EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Page 362 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt S canning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Printing Documents MP Navigator EX Printing Documents You can print multiple scanned images at one time print at specific quality etc using MP Navigator EX 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Print then click Print Document on the list gt SEN aay ick select he iaga Daae gt i neneme Core At Specie Categones cnn S v Document Inayat ekoted 2 Document O Burien Card gt DaresnCad Image 0 O Porteard b Porcad mapat Q Standard Size zj O POF Fite b Standynd Sine mapet Q ther b FOF Fie imaged v Others Ima
213. attern If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice If the problem is not resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved E8 Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 58 of 678 pages If the problem is still not resolved after replacing the FINE Cartridge contact the service center When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned See Aligning the Print Head Note You can also perform the maintenance operations from your computer For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 59 of 678 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern m Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles ES Note If the remaining ink level is low the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low See Replacing a FINE Cartridge You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4
214. ave Dialog Box e Save as PDF file Save the selected images as PDF files Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the save settings Save as PDF file Dialog Box Jump to Main Menu Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu Toolbar al ft Preferences Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box e Guide Opens this guide e Edit Tools mm e id Select All Selects all images in the Thumbnail window eo ba Cancel All Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window e L Rotate Left Rotates the target image outlined in orange 90 degrees counter clockwise Fa Rotate Right Rotates the target image outlined in orange 90 degrees clockwise Ad Invert Inverts the target image outlined in orange horizontally e 4 Trimming Trims the target image outlined in orange in the Thumbnail window Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest Click this button to open the Crop window and specify the trimming frame PS e aa Zoom in Enlarges the target image outlined in orange You can also enlarge the image by double clicking it amp U Display Size Changes the size of ima
215. ay be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure print settings that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer properties dialog box opens Important Opening the printer properties dialog box through Properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software About tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Page 664 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh You can open the Page S
216. aying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only About PictBridge Print Settings MP270 series only Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device Scanning Scanning Scanning Images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 86 of 678 pages Scanning Images Before Scanning Placing Documents Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
217. ays high resolution image in Preview i X Enlarge Reduce on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly However the resolution of the displayed image will be low e Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab Performs a trial scan CRPE 4 4 4 4 6 j 4j s e Scan Starts scanning Note When scanning starts the progress will be displayed Click Cancel to cancel the scan When scanning is completed a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open Follow the prompt to complete For details see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in Scan Tab Preferences dialog box It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size In that case a warning message appears It is recommended that you reduce the total size To continue scan in whole image view e Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan preview settings gt Preferences Dialog Box e Close Closes ScanGear scanner driver Toolbar e Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view In thumbnail view x Q SBA In whole image view oO Wels e Thumbnail al Whole image view Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals iJ K4 2880 i i x ii Page 496 of 678 pages Advanced Mode Tab Switches the view in
218. be created in the Printers window The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in the network In Windows XP Windows 2000 1 2 Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the machine and select Custom Install For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started EA Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation Start the wizard e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Settings on Client PC Page 670 of 678 pages Printers and Faxes gt Add a printer e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers gt Add a printer When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears click Next 3 Add a printer Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer Windows XP or Network printer Windows 2000 then click Next On the Specify a Printer window Windows XP or Locate Your Printer window Windows 2000 click Next and then search for the print server system Click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next Note If the ico
219. below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window appears P important Opening the printer driver setup window through Properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software For tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Maintenance Tab Page 295 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt Maintenance Tab Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the machine EE E Man 33 Page Saup of Etocs Ai Martensnce Gesing Botiom Plte Gearing Eo Bmrates urwarted smudges and ines in gt Preverts paper smudges dunng panting he pert erk Teenie be Geared Enocutes print mler cleaning for smoother Pt carnet se
220. ble vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks Confirm the displayed message and click OK The third pattern is printed P important Do not open the Scanning Unit Cover while printing is in progress Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the associated boxes Clicking the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the preview window will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 555 of 678 pages Aligning the Print Head Position Page 556 of 678 pages mice oea mm un z u o o o Se o UM iE oa ee er sm o o c ip a a ar i ee v z LA 2 o 2 M o i mmm oi ma o m lt o i i m a Sr 1 Se gt MG i ee When you have entered all the necessary values click OK ES Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white stripes A Less noticeable horizontal white stripes B More noticeable horizontal white stripes EB Note To print and check the current setting open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box and click Print Alignment Value Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page 557 of 678 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide g
221. bottom right of the pane Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Documents to My Manual Page 101 of 678 pages 4 Display My Manual When you double click or select and press Enter a document title displayed in List of My Manual that document is displayed in the explanation window Note To delete a document from List of My Manual select that document title from the list and then click Delete or press Delete Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Symbols Used in This Document Page 102 of 678 pages AeFilese aid Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Symbols Used in This Document Symbols Used in This Document Warning Instructions that if ignored could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation Caution Instructions that if ignored could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation gt Important Instructions including important information Be sure to read these indications ES Note Instructions as notes for operation or additional explanations Indicates operations in Windows acintosh Indicates operations in Macintosh Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Trademarks Page 103 of 678 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide g
222. bums etc See Solution Menu To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Canon Utilities Easy PhotoPrint EX then Easy PhotoPrint EX acintosh To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu click e Solution Menu in the Dock and click gt Print photos or albums etc See Solution Menu 2 Click Photo Print ES Note You can select Album Calendar Stickers etc besides Photo Print See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX CIT gt am 5 wel of DA gt n Sam ae a Mn gt lt gt are hoped Red ee ne a a i 3 Select a photo to print 1 Select the folder in which images are saved 2 Click the image to print The number of copies appears as 1 and the image you selected appears in the selected image area A You can select two or more images at the same time ES Note To print two or more copies click Up arrow to change the number of copies To cancel the selection click the image to cancel in the selected image area and click Delete Imported Image You can also use Down arrow to change the number of copies to zero You can also correct or enhance the selected image See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Click Select Paper Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 26 of 678 pages Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX 4 Select the loa
223. button on the window to display the description of each application 2 By clicking each button the introduced application starts Follow the same steps to view the manuals or online product information P important Internet connection is required to access the online information Internet connection fees apply Exiting Solution Menu Click E3 Close on the title bar Restriction on Use of Solution Menu This software is subject to the following restriction Keep this point in mind when using it e All icons of the installed applications that support Solution Menu are displayed in the window After the installation you cannot rearrange the icons or delete only the icons Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
224. by regular leaning paper feeding Part Head Aignment A Power O iil Exnctes pert head aligrenert to comet a Tume he peter off Pe misabgrmert of colors and ines Nozze Geck Quet Mode E Frets a patem to check whether the part E Alows you to seduce the operating nose head norges we clogged usuia hoe right or siert stustors bk Camndge Setings ay Custom Setings g Speotiies the ink cartridge for panting N Allows you to select operation options Mew Parter Satu Rot Features Cleaning the Print Heads s gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position mb Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Machine Setting the Ink Cartridge s gt Managing the Machine Power Related Features s gt Reducing the Machine Noise gt Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Canon IJ Status Monitor Page 296 of 678 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon lJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen You will know the status of the printer with graphics icons and messages Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon lJ Status Monitor launc
225. case restart the computer Use the default display font size of the OS Otherwise software screens may not appear correctly What You Can Do with This Software This software allows you to scan multiple documents at one time or scan images larger than the Platen You can also save scanned images attach them to e mail or print them using the supplied applications Screens Main Menus There are two types of MP Navigator EX Main Menu Navigation Mode screen and One click Mode screen Navigation Mode Screen You can start various tasks from the Navigation Mode screen including simple scanning scanning using ScanGear scanner driver and enhancing correcting images Scan Import Documents or Images gt Photos Documents Platen S y en E Show this window af tatu tT Preterences One click Mode Screen You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the One click Mode screen ff Preferences Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software Page 321 of 678 pages Scan Import Window Use the Scan Import window to scan photos and documents aca 0T Potences 2 3 2H AD ADD Bh Zann ajm omea E ER Color Photo S i D 3 meved Duet Document Size Aado Detect Multiple Documert Reccktion pape so O Use he saner diver Save Seve at POF fie
226. ced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Check 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen gt Placing Documents Check 2 Scan each item individually Some applications do not support multiple image scanning Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Page 626 of 678 pages AJEA Gilets Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Check 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen gt Placing Documents Check 2 Multiple image scanning may not be supported Some applications do not support multiple image scanning In that case scan each item individually Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Slow Scanning Speed Page 627 of 678 pages Nelieiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Slow Scanning Speed Slow Scanning Speed Check 1 To view the image on a monitor set the output resolution to around 150 dpi To print set it to around 300 dpi gt Resolution Check 2 Set Fading Correction Grain Correction etc to None Image Settings Check 3 In MP Navigator EX deselect the Correct slanted document checkbox and scan again s gt Scan Set
227. cedure below to check the status of the device 1 Click Control Panel Hardware and Sound then Device Manager If the User Account Control screen is displayed follow the on screen instructions In Windows XP click Control Panel Performance and Maintenance System then click Device Manager on the Hardware sheet In Windows 2000 click Control Panel System then Device Manager on the Hardware sheet 2 Double click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing Support If USB Printing Support is not displayed make sure that the machine is correctly connected to the computer Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer 3 Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 612 of 678 pages If a device error is displayed refer to Windows help to resolve the error MD error Number 300 Is Displayed e Check 1 If the Power lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the machine on While the Power lamp is flashing green the machine is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the machine directly to the co
228. chine may not operate properly when itis reinstalled To maintain optimal printing quality use a FINE Cartridge within six months of first use E8 Note If a FINE Cartridge runs out of ink you can print with either Color or Black FINE Cartridge in whichever ink remains only for a while However the print quality may be reduced compared to when printing with both cartridges We recommend to use new FINE Cartridges in order to obtain optimum qualities Even when printing with one ink only print with leaving the empty FINE Cartridge installed If either of the Color FINE Cartridge or Black FINE Cartridge is not installed an error occurs and the machine cannot print For information on how to configure this setting refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black and white document or when black and white printing is specified Both color ink and black ink are also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the Print Head which may be necessary to maintain the machine s performance When ink runs out replace the FINE Cartridge immediately with a new one Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Replacing a FINE Cartridge 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Paper Output Tray 2 Lift the Scanning Unit Cover then hold it open with the Scanning Unit Support C The FINE Cartridge Holder moves to the replacement position Caution
229. ck Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab The Quiet Mode dialog box opens Set the quiet mode If necessary specify one of the following items Do not use quiet mode The operating noise of the machine is at normal volume Always use quiet mode Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine Use quiet mode within specified time The operating noise of the machine can be reduced during a specified period of time Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated P important The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different p Transmit the settings Make sure that the machine is on and click Send Click OK when the confirmation message appears The settings are enabled hereafter Ea Note Depending on print quality settings effects of the quiet mode may be less Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page 567 of 678 pages NVelielelecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Machine Operation Mode Changing the Machine Operation Mode If necessary switch between various modes of machine operation The procedure for configuring settings is as follows Custom Settings 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Make sure that the machine is on and then click Custom Settings on the Maint
230. ck the image Set the Center Position Rotation and Size then click OK Note You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen Select an image in the Edit screen then click 2l Free Rotate and drag a corner of the image to rotate it See Help for details on the position and size of images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cropping Photos Page 206 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Cropping Photos al a Easy PhotoPrint Ex ers SS E gt Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box Drag the portion within the white freme onto the area to crop Drag any square on the freme to resize the cropping area Drag the white squares on the image to change the area to be cropped and click OK Note See Help for details on cropping Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Framing Photos Page 207 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Framing P
231. click Help Alternatively when the Sas Help button Is found at the night end of he tte bar click that buzon and then click he fem you want to learn abot A Gescripton of the item ts displayed ODO OL a Related Topic When you click a document title displayed in the contents pane found to the left of the on screen manual the documents of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side When you click found to the left of eS the document titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed Note Click 2 Set to close or display the contents pane Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 92 of 678 pages Operating the Explanation Window Page 93 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Explanation Window Operating the Explanation Window j Cance series On screen Manual dexo p G Contents yy My Manuali J Search Gy Pint gt Advanced Guide Advanced Guide How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operaing ihe Expl NOY Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document Trademarks 1 Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding document 2 The cursor jumps to the top of this document Note The diagrams and computer screens in this guide refer to MP270 series The operat
232. cratches or faded colors The color tone may be adversely affected Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image EA Note Selectable settings depend on color mode settings Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings Image Settings allows you to set the following items e Image Adjustment When Image Adjustment is set the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified document type The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image This setting is Auto by default e None Image Adjustment will not be applied e Auto Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type It is recommended that you normally select this setting e Photo Select this to apply Image Adjustment to photos e Magazine Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 506 of 678 pages Select this to apply Image Adjustment to magazines e Newspaper Select this to apply Image Adjustment to newspapers e Document Select this to apply Image Adjustment to text documents P important You can set Image Adjustment after preview You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Note If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto specify the document type The color tone may change from the
233. ct Images screen appears Selact rrapes for layout printing You can aso add repace mages brer ni the eding process To correct or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Agoly corrections and enhancements in the resuting screen a E soby ooe Inside Pages 0 mage s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click tal Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click a Delete All Imported Images Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 148 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears t print elements as needed at add images or change yout 3 N Edit the layout if necessary gt Changing Layout Adding Pho
234. cument Cover gently make sure that U uppercase U appears on the LED then press the Black or Color button The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet and the print head position will be adjusted automatically When adjusting the print head position is completed the LED returns to the copy standby mode Remove the sheet on the Platen Glass Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 65 of 678 pages gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded print head alignment sheet until adjusting the print head position is completed If adjusting the print head position has failed the error code will appear on the LED Press the Stop Reset button to release the error then confirm the following The Platen Glass and the print head alignment sheet are not dirty The print head alignment sheet is placed in the correct position with the printed side facing down For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide E9 Note If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above adjust the print head position manually from the computer For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide To print and check the current head position adjustment values display L on the LED then press the Black or Color button O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
235. d Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the frames on the page You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 140 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting a Photo E Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Select roges for stickers You Can ako addfreplace rages Bater N the eating crocess To comect or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Apoly corrections anc enhancements in the resuting screen a CRES E Sor by Date a A Inside Pages 0 mmagels 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete
236. d Normally the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer This method is suitable for printing sRGB data When you want to print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data effectively select ICM When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile select None The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set R TR aksep Man 13 Page Setup of Efecte AJ Martenance Plan Paper l The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Select color correction Click Matching tab select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following and click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Specifying Color Correction Page 265 of 678 pages Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer Driver Matching is the default setting for Color Correction ICM You can print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of
237. d By adjusting the threshold level you can sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers s gt Setting Threshold e Custom You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons Select Add Delete from the pull down menu When Color Mode is set to anything but Black and White the Add Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens When Color Mode is Black and White the Add Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens Add Delete Tone Curve Settings Setting Name Tone Curve Settings List New Setting Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Adjustment Buttons Page 511 of 678 pages Enter Setting Name and click Add The name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List Click Save to save You can load and apply the saved tone curve threshold settings to a preview image To load the settings select the saved item from the pull down menu To delete an item select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete Click Save to save settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List Note Save up to 20 items e Defaults Reset all adjustments saturation color balance brightness contrast histogram and tone curve Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Mode Tab Page 512 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scan
238. d Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers The MP Drivers you no longer use can be deleted When deleting the MP Drivers first exit all programs that are running The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows When There is an Uninstaller 1 Start the uninstaller e In Windows Vista or Windows XP select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt MP Drivers Uninstaller e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Programs gt Your model name gt MP Drivers Uninstaller The MP Drivers Uninstaller dialog box is displayed P important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning Execute the uninstaller Click Execute When the confirmation message appears click Yes When all the files have been deleted click Complete The deletion of the MP Drivers is complete P important a Printer driver and scanner driver ScanGear will be deleted when you uninstall t
239. d Photo Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab Fe en A ee ge Canon MP270 series Printer P a Oralarancen oF FR asc Setup Man 3 Page Setup of Btects AJ Martenance 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with vivid colors Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 285 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines Smoothing Jagged Outlines The Image Optimizer function allows you to smooth jagged outlines in photos and graphics that have been enlarged with your application This feature is especially useful when printing low resolution images from Web pages The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Image Optimizer Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab f DR Qsck Senp E Man 3 Page Setup of Efects A Martenance 3 Complete the setup Click OK The photos and graphics will be printed with jagged outlines smoothed ES Note Depending on application software or resolution of image data the Image Optimizer may have no discernible effects t may take longer to complete printing when the Image Optimizer is used Downloaded fro
240. d USB cable We recommend that the cable is no longer than around 10 feet 3 meters Does the operating system of your computer support Hi Speed USB connection Obtain and install the latest update for your computer Does the Hi Speed USB driver operate properly Obtain the latest version of the Hi Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware and reinstall it on your computer P important For details on Hi Speed USB of your system environment contact the manufacturer of your computer USB cable or USB hub Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 581 of 678 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks misaligned lines or uneven colors confirm the paper and print quality settings first e Check 1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper When these settings are incorrect you cannot obtain a proper print result If you are printing a photograph or an illustration incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the printout color Also if you print with an incorrect paper type setting the printed surface may be scratched In borderless printing uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and the loaded paper e MP270 series on
241. d conditions of the original which can be copied see Originals You Can Load 2 Start copying 1 Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies max 20 copies To make 1 to 9 copies or 20 copies Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 14 of 678 pages Copying Documents Page 15 of 678 pages Display the desired number of copies on the LED Each time you press the button the number on the LED increases by one When F appears the number of copies is set to 20 Press the button again to return to 1 To make 10 to 19 copies 1 Display F on the LED 2 Load only the desired number of sheets to copy 2 Press the Paper button repeatedly to select the page size and media type The Paper lamp indicates the selected page size and media type Here we select A4 or 8 5 x 11 Plain Paper Note You can select the following page sizes and media types A4 or 8 5 x 11 Plain Paper A4 or 8 5 x 11 Photo Paper 10x 15 cm or 4 x 6 Photo Paper You can switch the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel See Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter When the Fit to Page copy function is enabled you can copy the original in the size automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size In this case the original is copied with borders on the plain paper
242. d from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 185 of 678 pages The cropping effect applies only to the print result The original image will not be cropped See Help for details on the Crop window Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Page 186 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Easy PhotoPrint EX Se Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print To print the date the photo was taken on the photo click Date Settings in the Layout Print screen then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box Text Orientation A Landscape T Portrait Position Font Size Color F Apply to all images Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Page 187 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a mul
243. d from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Layout Page 144 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Changing Layout m Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving s gt Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 145 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Rem you wang to create from the manu Selact LOreey to access saved rems Page top Downloaded from Manu
244. d from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 157 of 678 pages Red eye is corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E9 Note Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images B 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Brightener Function Page 158 of 678 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background E8 Note a You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo Fix If the correction had not been made sufficiently applying Face Brightener function is recommended gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window
245. d in the initial settings cannot be deleted Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Ink Cartridge Page 564 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Setting the Ink Cartridge Setting the Ink Cartridge This feature enables you to specify the most appropriate ink cartridge among installed cartridges according to an intended use When one of the ink cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one you can specify the other ink cartridge that still has ink and continue printing The procedure for specifying the ink cartridge is as follows Ink Cartridge Settings 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Ink Cartridge Settings on the Maintenance tab The Ink Cartridge Settings dialog box appears 3 Select the ink cartridge to be used Select the ink cartridge to be used for printing and click OK The specified ink cartridge will be used from the next printing P important When the following settings are specified Black Only does not function because the machine uses the color ink cartridge to print documents e Other than Plain Paper Hagaki A Hagaki or Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab e Borderless is selected from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Do not detach an ink cartridge that is not in use Printing cannot be performed while eithe
246. d to Canon inkjet printer fax Printer s ID number instalation date and time Ink use information Number of sheets printed and Maintenance information In this survey we wil not collect or send any nforrration about your computer other than that above or any of your personal information For this reason from the information that is sent to us we are unable to identify specific customers 3 Wie sra tharafara nashla ta raenand Pa rannacte a Aierinta anu rnlartod nfarmeatinn If you agree that we collect and send the information above and that we cannot disclose any colected information cick Agree Otherwise cick Do not agree If you wish to uninstall this program cick Uninstall This wil uninstall the program and no further survey wil be made Uninstal Agree e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again ES Note When the information is being sent a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed In this case confirm that the program name is IJPLMUI exe then allow it f you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will not be sent automatically from
247. de Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt How to Detach Attach the Document Cover How to Detach Attach the Document Cover e Detaching the Document Cover Hold up the Document Cover vertically Attaching the Document Cover Insert both hinges A of the Document Cover vertically into the holder B to attach the Document Cover as illustrated below B Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Deleting the Undesired Print Job Page 653 of 678 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Deleting the Undesired Print Job Deleting the Undesired Print Job If the printer does not start printing the print job data cancelled or failed may be remaining Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor 1 Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar The Canon lJ Status Monitor appears 2 Display the print jobs Click Display Print Queue The print queue window opens 3 Delete the print jobs Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu When the confirmation message appears click Yes The deletion of the print job is complete P important Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of another user Ea Note When you perform this operation all print jobs are deleted If the print queue list contained a necessary print job start the printing pr
248. de Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Stapling Margin Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best staple position When you want to change the setting select from the list pow s Printer Dinano Preference i FR ask Senp E Man B Page Setup uf Stects A Martenance El Page Sze lne 85x11 z E amp Onertation A Pora A ungego gt Rotate 180 degoes a Sane bs Page Size a D a g Pisni Paper Lemee 85x11 215 2273 dew Nomalsize Bordetess Fto Page Scaled Page Layout g 3 J 3 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK gt nes 001 2 Cotar Hee Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Stapling Margin Page 227 of 678 pages 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width P important Staple Side and Specify Margin appear grayed out and are unavailabl
249. ded paper 1 Make sure that your machine s name is selected in Printer 2 Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Paper Size and Media Type Here we select 4 x6 10x15cm in Paper Size and the type of the loaded photo paper in Media Type E8 Note f you select the wrong media type the machine may not print with the proper print quality 3 Click Layout Print 5 Select a layout and start printing 1 Select the layout of the photo Here we select Borderless full The preview appears in the selected layout for confirmation of the required print result E8 Note You can change the direction of photo or crop photos trimming to print For details on the operation refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Click Print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 27 of 678 pages Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 28 of 678 pages Ea Note To cancel a print job in progress press the Stop Reset button on the machine or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor To display the printer status monitor click Canon XXX Printer where XXX is your machine s name on the taskbar acintosh Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in
250. der 2 Double click the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon AOD Extended Survey Program Preferences General Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent The survey program is turned on Turn off you wish to turn off this program click Turn off e Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent If the check box is selected the information will be sent automatically If the check box is not selected the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey Click the icon then follow the on screen instructions e Turn off Turn on button Click the Turn off button to stop the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Click the Turn on button to restart the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals For Windows Users Page 617 of 678 pages Nelieirjecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt For Windows Users For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed e Check Is the printer status monitor enabled Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor 1 Open the printer properties dialog box sb Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows 2 On the Maintenance sheet click View Printer Status 3 Select Enable Status Monitor on th
251. describe ScanGear s screens and functions and how to use ScanGear scanner driver Basic Mode Tab m Advanced Mode Tab Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons m Auto Scan Mode Tab s Preferences Dialog Box Scanner Tab Preview Tab Scan Tab Color Settings Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 487 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Basic Mode Tab Basic Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on screen steps This section describes the settings and functions available in Basic Mode 1 Settings and Operation Buttons 2 Toolbar 3 Preview Area Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened Settings and Operation Buttons e Select Source e Photo Color Scan color photos e Magazine Color Scan color magazines e Newspaper Grayscale Scan text and line drawings in black and white e Document Grayscale Scan documents and photos in black and white Select this mode to create high resolution black and white images E8 Note When you select a document type colors are adjusted based on the Unsharp Mask function or document type f you select Magazine Color the Descreen function will be active e Display Preview Image Downloaded from Manual
252. ding sections below for details on each button Creating Editing PDF Files gt Printing Documents s gt Printing Photos s gt Sending via E mail Editing Files EA Note 1 The buttons in Image Handling Buttons are displayed when the corresponding applications are installed Toolbar Tt Preferences Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box L Guide Opens this guide Edit Tools mim e id Select All Selects all images in the Thumbnail window Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 397 of 678 pages P Image Correction Enhancement Allows you to correct the target image outlined in orange Click this button to open the Correct Enhance Images window in which you can correct enhance images and also adjust the brightness contrast etc gt Correct Enhance Images Window P important Image correction enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files PS e ai Zoom in Enlarges the target image outlined in orange You can also enlarge the image by double clicking it You can check all pages when you select a PDF file You can also check file information such as file name date size and security setting A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open P
253. document is in poor condition dirty faded etc use Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction Grain Correction etc in Image Settings on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver gt Image Settings Check 7 If the color tone of images is different from the original document take the following measures and scan again e On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None Image Settings e Open the Preferences dialog box from the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver and set Color Matching on the Color Settings tab Color Settings Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Page 624 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Check Specify the scan area Click al Auto Crop in ScanGear scanner driver to automatically display the cropping frame scan area according to the document size You can also manually specify the scan area for example when there are white margins along the document or when you want to create custom cropping frames gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Page 625 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advan
254. documents with text in the wrong orientation rotated characters Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with narrow line spacing Documents with colors in the background of text Documents containing multiple languages e Reset Cancels the application setting e Set Allows you to select an application P important Depending on the specified application the text may not be extracted correctly or the application may not start e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon e Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings e Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes e Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults e Scan Scans documents with the specified settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 439 of 678 pages AJni Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Custom Dialog Box Custom Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One click tab or in the One click Mode screen to open the Custom dialog box ta Scan photos or documents and open them wth the registered appicaton Sean Stings Document Tyge Ato Mode F
255. e Ba rane IMG_0001 NEW Save as type POF Mutipie Pages z sq Password socurty senings E Save to a Subfolder wth Curent Date Seve C ci The Password Security Settings dialog box opens ES Note You can also open the Password Security Settings dialog box by clicking Set then selecting Password Security for Security in the PDF Settings dialog box F Enable keyword gearch Decree Langage Detect the otertation of tet documents and mitate reges F Cored darted doounert POF Compression Sonded Bor Seoypty SSS 3 Select the Require a password to open the document or Use a password to restrict printing and editing of the document and its security settings checkbox then enter a password Password Security Compamtdnity Acrobat 5 O and ier Enaypton Level High 128 b8 RIC4 V Require a password to open the documert Permissions 7 Use a password to restrict painting and editing of the document and ts securty setings Peenissors Password Parting Mewed Nene Changes Alowed None P important Up to 32 single byte alphanumeric characters can be used for the password Passwords are case sensitive Select both checkboxes to set both Document Open Password and Permissions Password You cannot use the same password for both 4 Click OK The Confirm Document Open Password or Confirm Permissions Password dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 371 of
256. e Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Vivid Photos Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing Select the pnter to use then select the sine and hype of paper bat printing Page Saroe Glosty Photo Paper Motie Photo Poper P important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box E Note Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox this effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing Photo Noise Page 183 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera noise may appear in the image Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid Select the perker touse then select the siae and hype of paper foe printing Preter Car
257. e Orientation Double page album or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout dialog box and click Date Settings 5 If you want to change the background click Background The Change Background dialog box appears In the Change Background dialog box you can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 121 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting a Photo Easy PhotoPrint EX S6 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears otoPrint EX E Seket roges for abam You can aso add repace mages ode n _ edting process To correct or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance butt Apply Corrections and enhancements in the resulting screen a 7 x a A E sory date E Orio a r cee E Computer E P Network INGOODO_stog IMGO001_sJo9 MG0109_sio9 a by g Front Cover Q 1 Inside Pages 0 rrape s Back Cover 0 1 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to
258. e ink is pumped out from the nozzles Used ink for nozzle cleaning is limited to a small amount Does black and white printing use color ink Black and white printing may use color ink depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver So color ink is consumed even when printing in black and white m Printing on special paper How to print with optimal quality Tip Check the machine status before printing e Is the Print Head OK If print head nozzles are clogged print will be faint and papers will be wasted Print the nozzle check pattern to check the Print Head See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect e Is the inside of the machine smeared with ink After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink Clean the inside of your machine with the Bottom Plate Cleaning See Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Tip Check how to load the paper correctly e Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation Load paper in the Rear Tray with the printing side facing you e Is the paper curled The curled paper causes paper jam Flatten the curled paper then reload it Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 80 of 678 pages Tip After loading paper be
259. e quality is flat due to lack of contrast you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast s Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Adjustment Buttons Page 510 of 678 pages eal Histogram A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image You can specify the darkest level shadow and brightest level highlight within an image cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image gt Adjusting Histogram ra e K Curve Settings Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph tone curve showing the balance of tone input and output You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area Adjusting Tone Curve e a Final Review Make a final check of color adjustments The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived from the subsequent image processing will be displayed There are no settings to make in this screen Final Review Channel Master wl e For a color image select a color in Channel to check either Red Green or Blue or select Master to check three colors together e f you place the cursor on the preview image the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values only K when Color Mode is Grayscale before and after the adjustments will be displayed A Threshold Set the boundary threshold at which black and white are divide
260. e Layout list on the Page Setup tab the selected printing function may not be effective depending on the version of Word If this happens follow the procedure below Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 644 of 678 pages 1 Open Word s Print dialog box 2 Open the printer driver setup window specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab and click OK 3 Without starting printing close the Print dialog box 4 Open Word s Print dialog box again 5 Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK 6 Start printing e Illustrator Adobe Systems Inc If bitmap printing takes effect printing may take time or some data may not be printed Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Notes Scanner Driver Page 645 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt General Notes Scanner Driver General Notes Scanner Driver ScanGear scanner driver is subject to the following restrictions Keep these points in mind when using it Scanner Driver Restrictions When using the NTFS file system the TWAIN data source may not be invoked This is because the TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons Contact the computer s administrator for help Some computers including laptops connected to the machine may not resume
261. e Option menu if it is not selected e If you are using Windows Vista Launching MP Navigator EX Whenever Pressing the SCAN Button on the Machine e Check Specify the response from pressing the SCAN button on the machine Follow the procedure below to specify the response on your computer 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Click Control Panel Hardware and Sound then Scanners and Cameras 3 Select WIA Canon XXX ser then click the Properties button If the User Account Control screen appears click Continue 4 Click the Events tab on the WIA Canon XXX ser Properties screen 5 Select Start this program for Actions then select MP Navigator EX Ver3 0 from the pull down menu Choose an event from the Select an event pull down menu then select MP Navigator EX Ver3 0 to launch for each event If MP Navigator EX Ver3 0 is already selected for each event click Cancel 6 Click OK Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Page 618 of 678 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them Note This section describe
262. e Smootwag Ex C thers Uerttame Pictured MP Navigator DONC 01 011003 jpg EA Note If you selected only one image in the View amp Use window the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears 4 Make sure that Auto is selected 5 Click Auto Photo Fix Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing O0 EN 22 Face Sharpener OS cota sects Ee P important Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application digital camera etc manufactured by other companies E8 Note a The Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons When you apply Auto Photo Fix dark backlit photos will be corrected automatically If the image is not corrected enough using Auto Photo Fix it is recommended that you apply Face Brightener on the Manual tab gt Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 340 of 678 pages Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Page 341 of 678 pages 6 Click OK The entire image is corrected enhanced automatically and F Correct Enhance appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image EA Note Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction enhancement Select the Apply to all images checkbox to
263. e again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save mm m Note Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Holidays Page 215 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Holidays DNI S Easy PhotoPrint EX S Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar a Click Set Holidays in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or click Setup Period Holiday in the Edit screen and click Set Holidays in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box Period From 12 2009 to 2 2010 Date Holiday Name Set as Holiday To add a holiday click Add The Add Edit Holiday dialog box appears To edit a saved holiday select it and click Edit To delete a holiday select it and click Delete To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar period click Clear Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Holidays Page 216 of 678 pages Holiday Name 7 Set as Holiday Period From 12 2009 to 2 2010 Month Year December 2009 X Day Date Day of week Sunday Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display tha
264. e as type is JPEG Exif and Document Type is not Auto Mode This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed EA Note You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected When you save an image with the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected an underscore is added to the beginning of the file name Example _lmage0001 jpg e Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Input Exif information Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder file name and Exif information Save Dialog Box Application Settings Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 442 of 678 pages e Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type The specified application starts after images are scanned P important Depending on the specified application the images may not appear correctly or the application may not start e Reset Cancels the application setting e Set Allows you to select an application to start e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon e Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings e Cancel
265. e default settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box Page 390 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan Import window In the Save dialog box you can make settings for saving images to a computer Save V WW Save the mage to the spected folder Save in C WWsers UserNtsme Pictures MP Navigator EX 2003_01_01 Browse e Fle rane IMG Save as type JPEG Et 7 Sa V Save to a Subfolder wth Qurrent Date e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP P important You cannot select JPEG Exif when Document Type is Text OCR e Set When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JP
266. e file format from Set Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application In that case select an option other than Auto in Save as type If you select JPEG Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable e Set When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images Select a file format for Document and Photo each When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB P important This function is available only when Sav
267. e format is available for corrected images 6 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 155 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Red Eye Correction Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash You can perform the Red Eye Correction function either automatically or manually EA Note a Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing To correct automatically select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and select the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears v v gt BS Conect enonce Images ox RedEye Conection 22 Face Shapenet os Diza Face Smcothing En C Users User Nameibeyandyrljpg E9 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window f
268. e registered title appears in the Stamp list Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp Click Define Stamp in the Stamp Background dialog box The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Select the stamp to be deleted Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab Then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again O O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 250 of 678 pages Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 251 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used You can select a bitmap file bmp and register it as a new background You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background An unnecessary background can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows Registering New Background 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab Dantas Dintian Preferences PR ask Senp E Man B Page Setup
269. e settings in Basic Mode or Advanced Mode will be applied 2 Selected Cropping Frame stationary thick broken lines The settings will be applied to the Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames simultaneously You can select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key 3 Unselected Cropping Frame stationary thin broken lines The settings will not be applied EA Note Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are displayed in whole image view Initial Cropping Frame In thumbnail view Cropping frame is not displayed initially Drag the mouse over a frame to create a cropping frame In whole image view A cropping frame Focus Cropping Frame is displayed automatically around the preview image according to the document size You can also create a cropping frame by dragging the mouse in the Preview area E Note Cropping frames are set according to the document size Auto Crop by default For details see Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab Preferences dialog box Adjusting a Cropping Frame The cursor will change into m Ty e Arrow when it is positioned over a cropping frame If you click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow the cropping frame will expand or contract accordingly Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 524 of 678 pages x a G The cursor will change
270. e starts copying Remove the photo on the Platen Glass after copying is completed gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded photo until copying is completed Note To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 18 of 678 pages Fit to Page Copying Basic Guide E Contents gt Copying gt Fit to Page Copying Fit to Page Copying The Fit to Page copy function enables you to copy the original automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size 1 Prepare for copying See step 1 in Copying Documents 2 Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies 3 Press the Paper button repeatedly to select the page size and media type E9 Note When the plain paper is selected for the media type the original is copied with borders When the photo paper is selected for the media type the original is copied without borders and fills the entire page In borderless copying slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page 4 Press the Fit to Page button The Fit to Page lamp lights up and the Fit to Page copy function is enabled The original is copied in the size automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size E8 Note Press the Fit to Page button again to cancel the Fit to Page copy function and copy the original in t
271. e the Machine O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 73 of 678 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller m Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller If the Paper Feed Roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it paper may not be fed properly In this case clean the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Roller so perform this only when necessary You need to prepare three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and remove any paper from the Rear Tray 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 3 Clean the Paper Feed Roller 1 Press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until b appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The Paper Feed Roller will rotate as it is cleaned 4 Clean the Paper Feed Roller with paper 1 Make sure that the Paper Feed Roller has stopped rotating and load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 2 Make sure that b appears on the LED then press the Black or Color button The machine starts cleaning The cleaning will be completed after the paper is ejected If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller contact the service center E9 Note After the cleaning is completed press the Stop Reset button to ret
272. e the pages of saved PDF files e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Select this to open the Save as PDF file dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Dialog Box settings such as destination folder and file name Save as PDF file Dialog Box EA Note To set passwords for PDF files select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image After scanning you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box Setting Passwords for PDF Files Application Settings Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type The specified applica
273. e this function to correct photos that have been shot against light When you change the Backlight Correction setting the result will be reflected in the preview image This setting is None by default e None Backlight correction will not be applied e Low Select this to correct slightly backlit photos This will not affect the image contrast e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this to correct strongly backlit photos This can affect the image contrast P important You can set Backlight Correction after preview You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small Note Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied Applying Grain Correction and Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Image Settings Page 508 of 678 pages setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns e Gutter Shadow Correction Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image the result will be reflected Preview the effects before scanning as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is pressed Unclear or blurred text lines caused by curved pages are not corrected This setting is None by default e None Gutter shado
274. e to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Jams Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray In Other Cases Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Error Number 300 Is Displayed Error Number 1700 Is Displayed Ink Info Number 1688 Is Displayed Ink Info Number 1686 Is Displayed Error Number 2001 Is Displayed MP270 series only Error Number 2002 Is Displayed MP270 series only Other Error Messages The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Problems with Scanning Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
275. e type according to the document to be scanned S un oin i What do you want to scan m a Select an aton Below for the hoe of picture you wart to scan E o Cpa pare E o gonsenan 5a Block and white pietre or tet Qon Serg You can also E8 Note To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture select Custom Settings 4 Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 532 of 678 pages Scanning with WIA Driver Page 533 of 678 pages a Advanced Properties Advanced Properties Resol tion DP Ih Picture tye 150 gt Color picture l e Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 e Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image thus softening the image Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 e Resolution DPI Enter the resolution Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi gt Resolution e Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your document e Reset Click to restore the original settings 5 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appear
276. e unnecessary print jobs from the printer status monitor Windows m Does the machine need to be handled with care when using or transporting Tip Do not use or transport the machine vertically or slanted If the machine is used or transported vertically or slanted the machine may become damaged or ink may leak from the machine Be sure not to use or transport the machine vertically or slanted Tip Do not place any object on the Document Cover Do not place any object on the Document Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction Also place the machine where objects will not fall on it Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 81 of 678 pages Tip Carefully choose the area to place the machine Place the machine at least 5 91 inches 15 cm away from other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps If the machine is placed closer to those it may not be able to work properly due to fluorescent noises m How to maintain the optimal printing quality The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the Print Head from drying or clogging Always follow the following steps for optimal printing quality e Follow the procedure below to disconnect the power plug 1 Press the ON button on the machine to turn it off 2 Make sure that the Power lamp is not lit 3 Disconnect the power plug
277. e we select Standard E8 Note For details on the print quality refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Primer Caron M7270 series eH fel Pesti Starctard tl Copies Collared Pages ar 2 fren 1 to l Paper Sine MA DW newman Orientation We te Quabty 6 Veda a Cr ae 4 Paper Source Rew Tray H tofi Sire halny O High sansad Ole 5 Cunan Cemyacaie Pr eting D C mee EA Note For details on the printer driver functions click Question on the Quality amp Media Color Options Borderless Printing or Margin screen The preview appears on the left of the dialog box to confirm the print result Some software applications may not have a preview function T Start printing Click Print to start printing EA Note Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Pause Printer If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 34 of 678 pages Printing Documents Macintosh Page 35 of 678 pages m For Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Note The screens used in this section are for printing with Mac OS X v 10 4 x
278. e when Borderless Poster or Booklet is selected for Page Layout e Scaled is selected for Page Layout When Duplex Printing is also selected only Staple Side is selectable Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Borderless Printing Page 228 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Borderless Printing Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper Without the borderless printing function a margin is provided around the printed data When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it select borderless printing The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab Setting Borderless Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set borderless printing Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Canca series Preferences TR ak Setup E Main 3B Page Setup of Etects A Martenance El Page Sze Lotier 8511 Ei amp Onertation A Pow A Lngcace a senna u E a a prati amla po Bordetes Page Layout na ry Click OK when the confirmation message appears When a message prompting you t
279. e with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click OK If you want to select from the images already imported click the Imported Images tab and select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK P important You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box E8 Note If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function all the images selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog box When images are replaced the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image Position Size Frame Position and size of the date The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited In the Replace Image dialog box you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Page 205 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos a Easy PhotoPrint EX KE Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position angle and size of images Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double cli
280. ear When you specify two or more copies in Copies the Collate check box will be selected 2 Make sure of the displayed settings Here we make sure that Plain Paper in Media Type Standard in Print Quality and A4 in Printer Paper Size are selected ES Note The settings can be changed However after changing Printer Paper Size confirm that the setting for Page Size on the Page Setup sheet matches the setting set in the software application For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide If you select the wrong media type the machine may not print with the proper print quality 3 Click OK om Artagan tee ae L ETP ETN TAA Note For details on the printer driver functions click Help or Instructions to view the online help or the on screen manual Advanced Guide The Instructions button appears on the Quick Setup Main and Maintenance sheets if the on screen manual is installed on your computer You can name the changed settings and add to Commonly Used Settings For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide To display the current settings next time when you open the printer driver setup window select the Always Print with Current Settings check box Some software applications may not have this function To display the preview to confirm the print result select the Preview before printing check box Some software applications may not have a preview function You can
281. eck 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen gt Placing Documents Check 2 Check that the MP Navigator EX settings are correctly set according to the document If you cannot scan properly with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel specify the document type or size in MP Navigator EX s gt Scanning Photos and Documents Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Page 639 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Check In MP Navigator EX deselect the Correct slanted document checkbox and scan again s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned I Page 640 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Check In MP Navigator EX deselect the Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page top D
282. ed settings including image correction enhancement and brightness contrast adjustment You can also display the source image and corrected image side by side for comparison P important Image correction enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files E Note The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement in the Zoom in dialog box It may take a while to correct large images See View amp Use Window for details on the View amp Use window I Correct Enhuece brn OO O E CELTAE y ES oor 1 Task Area 2 Toolbar Task Area Available tasks and settings vary between the Auto and Manual tabs Click Auto or Manual to open the corresponding tab Auto Tab Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image See Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically for details Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window fer _ e Cheni UreName Pictures MP Navigator EONO At 01 003 jpg e Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos e Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting EA Note Exif is a s
283. ed t Jue to Man Meru 2 Inthe Save as PDF file dialog box specify the save settings Specify the file type file name and destination folder Save as PDF file Dialog Box Save the mage to the spectied folder as a PDF fle Save as type FOF DAiple Pages E Password seourty settings You can save mutiple mages to one PDF fie CAs Usertaree Pach res MP Navigator X 2003_0 EF Seve to a Sublolder wth Qurert Date sve caret Select from the following PDF file types e PDF Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving as PDF Files Page 358 of 678 pages Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file ES Note PDF Multiple Pages is displayed when multiple images are selected e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well If a password protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords ES Note By default the following folders are specified as the destination folders Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures fold
284. ed with the adjusted intensity Related Topics gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Contrast Page 279 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct increase the contrast On the other hand to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct reduce the contrast No adjustment Adjust the contrast The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens o Adjust the contrast Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the c
285. eds 0 1 inches 3 mm 2 Load envelopes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Envelopes Page 47 of 678 pages 1 Open the Paper Support Do not raise the Paper Support 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the envelopes in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once 4 Slide the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the envelopes Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The envelopes may not be fed properly 4 B C B Rear side C Address side 3 Specify the settings in the printer driver ia 1 Select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup sheet 2 Select DL Env or Comm Env 10 in the Envelope Size Setting window 3 Select Landscape in Orientation acintosh 1 Select Envelope in Media Type 2 Select DL Envelope or 10 Envelope in Paper Size 3 Select the landscape orientation in Orientation Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Envelopes Page 48 of 678 pages gt Important If you do not specify the envelope size or orientation properly the address will be printed upside down or will be turned to 90 degrees ES Note The machine may make operating noise when feeding envelopes In Wind
286. een 5 Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned 6 Set the document size and scanning resolution as required 7 Start scanning Scanning starts Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Page 338 of 678 pages Adna titel Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions MP Navigator EX Useful MP Navigator EX Functions With MP Navigator EX you can correct enhance scanned images beautifully and search saved images quickly Correcting enhancing images automatically gt Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting enhancing images manually gt Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Adjusting color characteristics such as brightness and contrast gt Adjusting Images Searching for lost images gt Searching Images Classifying and sorting images s gt Classifying Images into Categories Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting Enhancing Images Automatically MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct enhance scanned images automatically Page 339 of 678 pages MP Navigator EX 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator
287. egorie amp gt Powy leaped gt StontedSee limape0 gt POFFi img0 J gt Otar beapend y v Ued magert Chasity mages gt ror EN amp Send D Ediy Canvent OMe Selections H Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Classifying Images into Categories Page 352 of 678 pages Images are sorted into the following categories Photos Portrait Others Documents Business Card Postcard Standard Size PDF File Others Custom categories Displays your custom categories To create custom categories see Creating Custom Categories Unclassified Displays images that have not yet been classified E8 Note Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically Click Cancel to stop Classification may take time if there are many images to classify P important Even if you classify images saved in removable media such as USB flash drive and external hard disk the classification information will be deleted once you remove the media From the next time the images are classified to Unclassified Images cannot be classified when Recently Saved Images is selected in the View amp Use window EA Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories In that case drag and drop the image to the correct category Images saved in network folders may not be classified You can search for images by category See Searching Images for details
288. elect what to do with ScanGear scanner driver after scanning images Close ScanGear automatically is selected by default e Close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed e Do not close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the ScanGear scanner driver screen for another scan when scanning is completed e Display the dialog to select next action Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed Scanning is completed Select the action you prefer to take Retoxh and save the mage Oore ScarGear siog Stan other images Do not dese ScanGear L 00 not display Sis dalog ogan You may modify this setting on Scan tab of Preferences disiog cJ E8 Note Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set some applications may not support it Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Settings Tab Page 520 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Color Settings Tab Color Settings Tab On the Color Settings tab you can specify the following settings e Color Adjustment Select either of the following Recommended is selected by default This function is available when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale e Recommended Selec
289. en All a l Close All Close All Hides all images a Open All Open All Displays all images EA Note Immediately after opening the View amp Use window or sorting images all images appear and Close All is displayed Click Close All to change to Open All e Specific Categories All Categories You can narrow down the categories to display only those containing images If you narrow down the categories more images are displayed in the Thumbnail List area allowing you to find or move images easily This button is displayed only when My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed e Specific Categories Specific Categories Displays categories containing images along with the contained images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 399 of 678 pages All Categories All Categories Displays all categories and images ES Note Click Specific Categories to change to All Categories e Edit Custom Categories Edit Custom Categories When My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed the Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens In the Edit Custom Categories dialog box you can add delete categories displayed in Custom Categories See Classifying Images into Categories for details Classify Images Classify Images Images imported from hard disks appear in Unclassified Click Classify Images to classify them automatica
290. enance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens EA Note Ifthe machine is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the machine status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 If necessary complete the following settings Prevent paper abrasion The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high density printing to prevent paper abrasion Check this check box to use this function Align heads manually The Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is normally set to automatic head alignment but you can change it to manual head alignment If the printing results are unsatisfactory even after you execute automatic head alignment see Aligning the Print Head Position and execute manual head alignment Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment Ink Drying Wait Time You can set the length of the machine rest time until printing of the next page begins Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries increase the ink drying wait time Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing 4 Transmit the settings Click Send and click OK when the confirmation message appears The machine operates
291. ents 4 Preterence _ 2 3 A pal las r Be Ome a m o Place Documests Open the document cover and place the photo or Gamert onthe lten Sue Qe Select Docesent Typo tuto Detect Mutigle Documents e of phota documert tom Documert Resohsior Wai soen Click Scan Scanning datz O Use he soanar diver Jue to Man Meru 5 Click Specify Select Auto Detect Multiple Documents for Document Size When setting is completed click OK Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents gt Specty advanced settings for scanning photos and docurerts Documers Type Color Photo N CEE gt Sering Fieschten Oa Cl Descreen Reduce Showthrough Fl Urcharp Mask Remove gutter shadow Cl Corect slanted document C Detect the onertation of text documerts and rotate magos Documert L anguaze Ervgkats x Folow the procedure below to scan photos oe documents it Pretecence BAT Bim m i tym a o Place Documests Open the document cover and place the photo or Gooumer on the platen 2 Select Docesent Typo a the hype of phota document bem Document Click Scan Scanning datz Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Page 330 of 678 pages Multiple documents are scanned at one time When scanning is completed the Scan Complete dialog box opens Select Scan or Exit Select Scan to scan the next documen
292. er Seiccted t om on Print i E Sona P EdiyConvert 7j mE m Ea Ediy Com Selections of Jumo to Man Meru i 4 C Unert Urerhlame Dichores MP Navigator EX 2009 01 08 005 NEW pd Note Only the Document Open Password will be required The Permissions Password will not be required If the Zoom in dialog box with a lock icon opens click Enter Password Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page 374 of 678 pages CUa serene Pores MP Navigation EX 2009_01_07 Pestword Seosty POF Fle 12 Select ths mage Punter of comes D 4 Back Not ING pe is protected Please enter a document open password A Ok Cancel to cancel the process The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box Note To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box re enter the password Entering a Password Permissions Password to Edit or Print a File 1 In the View amp Use window select PDF files and click PDF or Print Cick to select the image 1T __ Prefecmnces IG 1HP izan ja Ge ee I Gore At Specie Categenes Edt Custom Categones j v Photo wen b Pora inspuit b Others Imagen v Doune nags eketet 2 b BnrenCad Image Pomad ksozet0 Stordant Ste beaget0 POF Fie kaapt Selected 2 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files Page 375 o
293. er Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder You can set passwords for PDF files Setting Passwords for PDF Files 3 Click Save Scanned images are saved according to the settings To further use edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box gt Creating Editing PDF Files s gt Printing Documents s gt Printing Photos s gt Sending via E mail Editing Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Editing PDF Files Page 359 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Creating Editing PDF Files Creating Editing PDF Files Create edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX After scanning documents and saving them open the View amp Use window to create PDF files and add delete pages rearrange the page order etc 5 l l Chk to select the iapa SE eee 8 6 5a CoeAl Specie Categanes Edt Custom Categones _ Hy Bos SeannedMepeted Images EN Darso sn TT en ai rer Document a b Burrecr Cad imaged Q burines Card O Portend b Postcard tages Sandaed Sze z O POF fie b Started Soe kuspe O thes b POE Fie imager x v Others Imsgerd Mekcint 2 ror ome a gt Coste E dt POF the Open FOF
294. er slightly to set the Scanning Unit Support back to its original position and gently close the Scanning Unit Cover Caution When setting the Scanning Unit Support back to its original position be sure to hold the Scanning Unit Cover firmly and be careful not to get your fingers caught E9 Note if the Alarm lamp lights or flashes orange after the Scanning Unit Cover is closed refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide When you start printing after replacing the FINE Cartridge the machine starts cleaning the Print Head automatically Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or the print head position is misaligned adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Checking the Ink Status Page 70 of 678 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing a FINE Cartridge gt Checking the Ink Status m Checking the Ink Status You can check the ink status with the Ink lamps on the Operation Panel or with the computer screen EA Note The ink level detector is mounted on the machine to detect the remaining ink level The machine considers as ink is full when a new FINE Cartridge is installed and then starts to detect a remaining ink level If you install a used FINE Cartridge the indicated in
295. er Function Adjusting Images Correct Enhance Images Window Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from How Do Print with Even Margins What Is C1 or C4 Photo Print Settings Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 85 of 678 pages Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Displ
296. er Sze Letter 85x11 Page Layout Poter D a a Pisin Paper Lome 8 5 11 215 279 dem Bordetess FttoPage Scaled Page Layout w E8 Note Click the deleted pages to display them again Right click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages 2 Complete the setup After completing the page selection click OK When you execute print only specified pages will be printed P important When Poster is selected the Duplex Printing Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed out and are unavailable Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it the print results may become coarse Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 240 of 678 pages Page top Booklet Printing Page 241 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Booklet Printing Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet Data is printed on both sides of the paper This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly in page number order when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center Z The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current
297. er properties dialog box quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available _acintosh 1 Open the Print dialog box s gt Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh 2 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu and then select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available E Note Printing speed may not improve noticeably by following the instructions above depending on your system environment Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Page 604 of 678 pages Neliirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing e Check 1 Is the Power lamp off Check if the Power lamp is lit green The FINE Cartridge Holder will not move unless the power is on If the Power lamp is off close the Scanning Unit Cover and turn the machine on While the Power lamp is flashing green the machine is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green and then open the Scanning Unit Cover again e Check 2 Is an error code displayed on the LED Close the Scanning Unit Cover confirm the err
298. er type e Paper size This setting is not available for this machine e Color format Select how to scan the document Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with WIA Driver e File type Select a file format from JPEG BMP PNG and TIFF e Resolution DPI Enter the resolution Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi 300 dpi is set by default gt Resolution e Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 100 to 100 e Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image thus softening the image Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also enter a value 100 to 100 e Preview or scan images as separate files Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files e See how to scan a picture Click to open Windows Help and Support 4 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appears on the right 5 Click Scan When scanning is completed the scanned image appears in the application Scanning with WIA Driver 1 0 The following is an example of scanning using Paint 1 Place the document on the Platen gt Placing Documents 2 In File click From Scanner or Camera Select the command to scan a document in the application 3 Select an imag
299. ers e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP Auto is displayed by default P important When Document Type is Auto Scan and Save as type is Auto the file format may differ depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents Large documents such as A4 size photos that cannot be placed away from the edges arrow alignment mark of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is Auto In that case select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned ES Note If you select the Enable Auto Photo Fix checkbox in the Scan Settings dialog box and then select a format other than JPEG Exif for Save as type a message appears and the Enable Auto Photo Fix checkbox will be deselected When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards CD DVD and business cards JPEG Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change the file format from Set e Set When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images Select a file format for saving Document and Photo each When Save as type is JPEG Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change t
300. ers s gt Aligning the Print Head Position sb Checking the Print Head Nozzles s Cleaning Inside the Machine Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Heads Page 550 of 678 pages Velieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print even though there is enough ink The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows Cleaning 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning 3 Execute cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute Print head cleaning starts 4 Complete cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem clean it once more Deep Cleaning Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do
301. ers User Name inendtjpg Selected 3 E8 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking F Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Auto Enhancement 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 164 of 678 pages 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing 5 Click OK Skin is enhanced beautifully and the g Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation If you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Enhancement 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing I rr RedEye Conecton 2 Face Brghte
302. ers are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB P important This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG Exif and Document Type is not Auto Mode This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed ES Note You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected When you save an image with the Save the JPEG Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected an underscore is added to the beginning of the file name Example _ mage0001 jpg e Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Input Exif information Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder file name and Exif information Save Dialog Box ES Note To set passwords for PDF files select Open the save dialog box after sca
303. es are automatically selected Note When you uncheck the check box of a document title that document is not printed Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 2 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 3 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 4 Execute print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing This Manual Page 97 of 678 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents are printed P important A large amount of paper is necessary to print all documents Before printing be sure to check the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the zoom rate However if the print data extends outside the paper because of the new zoom rate that portion of the document will not be printed on the paper Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 98 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Using Keywords to Find a Document Usi
304. es show through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color Adjust the show through level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image Move the slider to the right to increase the show through removal effect Defaults Resets each adjustment brightness contrast sharpness blur and show through removal Reset Selected Image Cancels all adjustments applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied adjustments Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied adjustments displayed in the list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Correct Enhance Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 174 of 678 pages S Correct Enhance Images Auto Adjust e RedEye Coneetion Face Bogena 92 Face Shapenet ZS Week aij Stog Speedy He oes you worl to comect oS Dipal Face Soothing 99 Blevith Remover CAUsers User Name gitljpg Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider E Note For Photo Print red eyes are automatically corrected when Enable Auto Photo Fix is selected in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox is selected To di
305. es you to specify the output size and make image corrections when scanning ScanGear scanner driver can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN ScanGear scanner driver is a TWAIN compatible driver What You Can Do with This Software This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size etc when scanning documents It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone as it allows you to make various corrections and adjust brightness contrast etc Screens There are three modes Basic Mode Advanced Mode and Auto Scan Mode Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen E8 Note a ScanGear scanner driver starts in the last used mode Settings are not retained when you switch between modes Basic Mode Use Basic Mode to scan easily by following three simple on screen steps D i 3 and 9 Advanced Mode Use Advanced Mode to specify color mode output resolution image brightness color tone etc when scanning Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver Ato ou FF Redxce Oust rd Soeihes 1 Nore bd Fades Correction i Nore Gran Comecnon Nore Baddght Comrecton 1 None Gutter Dadon Correcton Nore ewan Oem a Auto Scan Mode holier Preferences e
306. esolution 600 dpi dpi Scale 200 Setting the Resolution in ScanGear Scanner Driver In ScanGear scanner driver you can specify the resolution with Output Resolution in Output Settings on Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Resolution Page 527 of 678 pages the Advanced Mode tab Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale The scanning resolution is automatically set so that the value set in Output Resolution will be the resolution of the scanned image If you set Output Resolution to 300 dpi and scan at twice the size the document will be automatically scanned at 600 dpi and the resolution of the scanned image will be 300 dpi You can print the document with sufficient quality using a 600 dpi color printer When Printing L Size 8 9 cm x 12 7 cm Photos at Twice the Size Document resolution 300 Scan at twice the size Image resolution printing resolution dpi Actual scanning resolution 600 300 dpi Output resolution 300 dpi dpi Scale 200 Appropriate Resolution Settings Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image For displaying on a monitor 150 dpi For printing 300 dpi When Output Size is set to Flexible in ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab Select Source is Platen and the scale is 100 Document Use Color Mode Output Resolution Color photo Copying Color 300 dpi Printing Creating a postcard 300 dpi Using on a website or attaching Color 75 dpi 150 dpi
307. ettings in the screen to their defaults e Scan Scans documents with the specified settings When scanning is completed the e mail software program starts automatically and a new message screen appears with the image attached Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals OCR Dialog Box Page 436 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt OCR Dialog Box OCR Dialog Box Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One click tab or in the One click Mode screen to open the OCR dialog box o gt Scan documents and cones them to tent files Sean Stings Oocumert Tyge Document z Color Mode Color Documegt Sze Letter Resol gon IS El Use the scanner dryer Ssecty Save Setings Fie rane Ms Seve ss te CEB R se Saven CAUsers UeerName Pctres MP Navigate Browse F Sarre to a Subfolder wth Qurert Date Aophcation Settings OCR with MP Nevigster EX E Stat scanning by chcking the one click button boy Cancel Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK With 850 inches 1 00
308. ettings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key Unselected no outline The settings will not be applied When al Whole Image is displayed on the Toolbar Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab Page 499 of 678 pages E Note You can specify the scan area cropping frame on the displayed image In thumbnail view you can only create one cropping frame per image In whole image view you can create multiple cropping frames gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Related Topic Scanning in Advanced Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Input Settings Page 500 of 678 pages AdvancedGmide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Input Settings ScanGear Input Settings EEEE gowang ce a Preferences ese j Input Settings allows you to set the following items e Select Source The type of document to be scanned is displayed e Paper Size Select the size of the document to be scanned This setting is available in whole film image view only When you select a size the Preview area size changes accordingly P important Some applic
309. etup dialog box and the Print dialog box from the application program you are using Opening the Page Setup Dialog Box Open the Page Setup dialog box to specify page paper settings before printing 1 Select Page Setup on the File menu in your application program The Page Setup dialog box opens Opening the Print Dialog Box Open the Print dialog box to specify print settings before printing 1 Select Print on the File menu in your application program The Print dialog box opens Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh Page 665 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh To open the Canon lJ Printer Utility follow the procedure below In Mac OS X v 10 5 x 1 Select System Preferences on the Apple menu 2 Click Print amp Fax 3 Select your machine s name in the Printers and click Open Print Queue The job list of your machine is displayed 4 Click Utility maa Printer Ready Status Name User When Completed The Printer List opens 5 Select your machine s name in the Product list and click Maintenance uss AOR nna Type MP270 series Canon i Printer aaa 1 Ceran The Canon lJ Printer Utility starts up Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh P
310. ext into one file General Tab Text displayed in Notepad included with Windows is for guidance only Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points at 300 dpi Slanted documents Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation rotated characters Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with narrow line spacing Documents with colors in the background of text Documents containing multiple languages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 370 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files MP Navigator EX Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set passwords for opening editing and printing PDF files You can set two passwords one for opening the file and one for editing printing it P important 2 In Windows 2000 Internet Explorer 5 5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function You will not be able to open edit the file if you forget the password Record your passwords in a safe place for future reference Password protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security
311. f 678 pages 2 To create a PDF file or edit the file select Create Edit PDF file on the list To print the file click Print Document In the Password dialog box you will be prompted to enter a password Password IMG 0001 pdf is protected Please enter a permissions password Ock Cancel to cancel the process ES Note If the Document Open Password is set as well the Document Open Password will be required then the Permissions Password will be required 3 Enter the password and click OK The corresponding dialog box opens P important f apassword protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords Setting Passwords for PDF Files Related Topic Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP Navigator EX Screens Page 376 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens MP Navigator EX Screens Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX Scan Import Documents or Images Tab Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window e Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents e Save Dialog Box e Save as PDF file Dialog Box View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab View amp Use Window Create Edit PDF file Window Print Document Dialog Box Print Photo Dialog Box Send via E mail Dialog Box
312. faprinter that supports Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed you cannot print items you create f Easy PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy LayoutPrint installed Easy LayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy PhotoPrint EX E8 Note Printing on paper larger than A4 is available with supported printers only See your printer manual for details See Help of Easy PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy PhotoPrint EX screens Click Help in a screen or dialog box or select Easy PhotoPrint EX Help from the Help menu Help appears About Exif Print Easy PhotoPrint EX supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 107 of 678 pages Easy PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications See the application s manual for details on the procedure for starting The Photo Print function is available with the following applications e MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later e ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 0 or later e Digital Photo Professional Ver 3 2 or later P important Easy PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Pho
313. ferences in the Navigation Mode screen is displayed Select the e mail software program you want to use Adjust attachment file size When Save as type is JPEG selecting this checkbox allows you to resize the images Select a size from Size e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one If resized the resized images are saved The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e File name Enter the file name of the image to be attached up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Set You can specify a compression type for JPEG files Select High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 408 of 678 pages Wiest Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Correct Enhance Images Window MP Navigator EX Correct Enhance Images Window Click P Image Correction Enhancement in the View amp Use window or click Fix photo images in the Task Button area to open the Correct Enhance Images window In the Correct Enhance Images window you can make advanc
314. ff Martenance A J Page Layout Noenslsize Eaa Custom 8 50 11 00 Nomie Guielem fetoPagpo Scaled Page Lat Paper Sre Weth 850 inches 2 17 16 54 Hadt 1100 5 inches 0582339 Cox cm Co Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 258 of 678 pages 4 Set the custom paper size Specify Units and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used Then click OK 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified paper size Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Page 259 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome s gt Specifying Color Correction s gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles s gt Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast s gt Simulating an Illustration gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data
315. for scanning photos and doourrerts Doamers Type eonen Color Mode Cotee X Socument Sze Lemer Scanning Biesektion 200 dpi El Descreen F Reduce Showthrosgh 2 Urehap Mask FI Remove gtier shadow E Corect started document E Detect the onjentaton of tet documents and rotate images E Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned When Auto Mode or Auto Scan is selected the document type is automatically detected In that case Color Mode Document Size etc are automatically set as well P important Toscan correctly select a document type that matches the document to be scanned When opened from the Scanner Button Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box the Document Type specified in the Scanner Button Settings tab is displayed and cannot be changed in this dialog box e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Color This mode renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of R ed G reen and B lue e Grayscale This mode renders the image in 256 levels 8 bit of black and white e Black and White This mode renders the image in black and white The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels threshold level into black and white and is rendered in two colors EA Note Color Mode is not displayed in the Scan Settings dialog box opened from the Scanner Button Settings
316. from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Jams Page 607 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams Paper Jams Note f you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing press the Stop Reset button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine s gt Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray In Other Cases Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Page 608 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Remove the paper following the procedure below 1 Slowly pull the paper out either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot whichever is easier t EA Note Ifthe paper tears and a piece remains inside the machine turn the machine off open the Scanning Unit Cover and remove the paper Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine After removing all paper close the Scanning Unit Cover and turn the machine back on If you cannot pull the paper out turn the machine off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically 2 Reload the paper and press the Stop Reset button on the machine If you turned off the machine in step 1 all print jobs in
317. fter performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace the FINE Cartridge e Check 2 Is the FINE Cartridge installed properly If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed securely ink may not be ejected correctly Open the Scanning Unit Cover open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover then close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover When you close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover push the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks into place e Check 3 When a FINE Cartridge runs out of ink replace it with a new one Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Page 603 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected e Check 1 Is printing performed in Quiet Mode Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode in the printer driver For faster printing do not print in Quiet Mode gt Reducing the Machine Noise e Check 2 Is the print quality set too high Increase the printing speed setting in the printer driver Setting to prioritize speed makes printing faster Windows 1 Open the printer properties dialog box b Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows ve Click Here for MP270 series Printer Driver ve Click Here for MP250 series Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the print
318. g Colors Using a Color Pattern Brightening colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting images that are too dark or bright or too flat due to lack of contrast gt Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting the color tone using histogram a graph showing brightness distribution Adjusting Histogram Adjusting the image brightness using tone curve a graph of brightness balance Adjusting Tone Curve Sharpening characters in text documents or reducing show through effects s gt Setting Threshold Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correc Page 470 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc The Image Settings functions in Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver allow you to enhance the outline of the subjects reduce dust scratches and correct faded colors when scanning images 4 4 4 4 ej jejo Paha mn a Setting Items Click Arrow of a function and select an item from the pull down menu Reduce Dust and Saatc
319. g Photo Noise Page 290 of 678 pages Depending on application software or resolution of image data effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious am When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras image may be distorted Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Overview of the Printer Driver Page 291 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations s gt Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printer Driver Operations Canon Printer Driver Operations MA 5385 V1 00 Page 292 of 678 pages a D Instructions for Use Printer Driver How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Printing an Envelope Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Chang
320. ge 491 of 678 pages Basic Mode Tab Page 492 of 678 pages checkbox selected will be scanned E Note a When multiple images are previewed different outlines indicate different selection status Focus Frame thick blue outline The displayed settings will be applied Selected Frame thin blue outline The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key Unselected no outline The settings will not be applied Double click a frame to zoom in on the image Click Frame Advance at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next frame Double click the frame again to return the display to its non magnified state When a Whole Image is displayed on the Toolbar Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned Note You can specify the scan area cropping frame on the displayed image In thumbnail view you can only create one cropping frame per image In whole image view you can create multiple cropping frames gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Related Topic Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 493 of 678 pages Scanning in Basic Mode Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Advanced Mode Tab Page 494 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning
321. ger Selected 2 2x A e 1 t E Eise Oms ome Omo p9 foie Selections HH Send E E Jumo to Man Meru E istare NO Hinigatoe EA2900 01M 0002 jpg P important f a password protected PDF file is selected you will be prompted to enter the password gt Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files 3 Specify print settings as required In the displayed dialog box specify print count quality scale etc gt Print Document Dialog Box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents DP Carmo MP Navigation EX Prirtor Papot Source Page Layout X Homare Pring p a gt Normaksiza Lotter 8 5 x11 100 x Pisin Poper Paces Sae v Piet Oy X A eda Type C Grapicale Pirtirg Ost C Preview befioe parting EH P important Atnormal size 100 some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped In that case select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size 4 Click Print Printing starts ES Note When printing a multiple page PDF file via Print Document printing may take time depending on your computer In that case follow these steps and change settings 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel 2 Click Printers 3 Right click the icon of your printer and click Properties The printer properties dialog box opens 4 Click the Advanced tab 5 Select Spool print documents so program finishes
322. ges Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist This function may not work properly depending on the document language Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly In that case select the scanned image in the Thumbnail window of the Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window and rotate it with Edit Tools Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images e Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist e Defaults Restores th
323. ges Font Sye Ejga Maine He Eie Fae Edit General Tre aa L Coe ham a Print Settings ya A TA re sumer Order xj Aln Osrbute X a amp gt fas Cover Inside Pages Back Cover a ee A mm i Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text Note a Inthe Edit Text Box dialog box you can change the position angle and size of the text You can also set the color and line of the text box See Help for details To change the entered text select it and click Edit Text Box The Edit Text Box dialog box appears You can change the text Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Page 214 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Saving Easy PhotoPrint EX S Saving You can save edited items Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Check abum pring sattings Ckck the Pring button to pring with the current settings Canon 00x X Ad 7 Ouplex Printing BAS When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a fil
324. ges in the Thumbnail window 7 Sort by Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date ascending or descending Thumbnail Window e Thumbnail Window Scanned images are displayed When you select the checkbox of an image the image appears in the Selected Images area ES Note Thumbnails may appear as when there is not enough memory to display the images When Images are Sorted by Categories e Close All Open All a Close All Close All Hides all images e Open All Open All Displays all images EA Note Click Close All to change to Open All Selected Images Area e iii Cancel All Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area o ni Cancel Selection Cancels the selection of the target image outlined in orange in the Selected Images area e Selected Images Area Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 385 of 678 pages Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Page 386 of 678 pages Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed Related Topic Scanning Photos and Documents Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Page 387 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents T
325. gs dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening editing and printing created PDF files Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Addto This is displayed when you select PDF Add Page for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are added To change the file click Browse to specify another one P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Settings Dialog
326. gs on the calendar and set the background ES Note You can customize the calendar display font colors of the dates and days of the week position and size of the calendar etc Setting Calendar Display You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change Background dialog box To display the Change Background dialog box click Background E Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 131 of 678 pages See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 132 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Selact rroges for alandar You lt an abo aid replace mages in the edking process To correct or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Apply Corrections and enhancements in the resulting screen a H E soby ate ING0012_sJ090 1MG0009_sJo9 G0002_sic 9 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image
327. gt Other Settings gt Adding Photos Gal Eror Adding Photos You can add images to pages Select the page you want to add photos in the Edit screen then click E Add Image EA Note a The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create D mG0001_s429 Edit Tools Bee MAn Oe Ee 7 DH L M Gnnn inn MANNII lt 9 MANNI inn aaae Sine soe DE Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add Image dialog box and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right EA Note Click an image to select it background turns blue or deselect it background turns white You can also select multiple images Select an option for Add to and click OK P important You can add up to 20 images at one time to a single page Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time Add it one at a time When the number of pages increases due to added images you cannot add images beyond page 400 E Note Inthe Add Image dialog box you can select all images at one time or change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Swapping Positions of Photos Page 203 of 678 pages AdvancediG
328. hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds e Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle within 0 1 to 10 degrees or 0 1 to 10 degrees of the document P important The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text Documents with extremely large or small fonts Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures images or hand written text Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines tables e PDF Compression Select a compression type for saving Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Settings Dialog Box Page 394 of 678 pages e Standard It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Compresses the file size when saving allowing you to reduce the load on your network server P important Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high compression Note The following images can be compressed with high efficiency Images with resolutions within the range of 75 dpi to 600 dpi e Security Set passwords for opening editing and printing the created PDF files P important In Windows 2000 Internet Explorer 5 5 Service Pack 2 or later is requ
329. he Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply This function may not be available in some regions Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds When Single color is Selected Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK Change Background Ea j Background Type D Select from samples gt Image file No background Background Color Standard color a D Custom color Customize C Apply to all pages Cancel Help When Image file is Selected Set Image File Path and Image Layout then click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 200 of 678 pages Changing Background Page 201 of 678 pages Background Type O Select from samples Single color Image file No background Image File Path gt C Users User Name IMG0032_s ipg E Semitransparent Transparency 10 v Image Layout Crop to fit page Auto scale to fit page Tile D Original size Apply to all pages Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adding Photos Page 202 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software
330. he Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Sharpener Function 4 Click Face Sharpener Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener 5 Click OK The face is sharpened and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result 1 Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation f you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Sharpener RS RedEye Comection 22 Face Baghtenet Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 161 of 678 pages Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 16
331. he MP Drivers When There is No Uninstaller When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows Vista follow these steps 1 Select the printer to be deleted Select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click the model to delete then press the Alt key on your keyboard On the File menu click Delete Delete the printer When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Then when the confirmation message appears click Yes The icon is deleted Select the printer driver to be deleted Press the Alt key On the File menu select Run as administrator and then click Server Properties When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Click the Drivers tab In the Installed printer drivers list click the printer to delete Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Page 657 of 678 pages 4 Delete the printer driver When you click Remove Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed Select Remove driver and driver package and then click OK In the confirmation dialog box click Yes When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box click Delete 5 Click OK The deletion of the printer driver is complete P important You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers list If this happens restart your computer and try again
332. he One click Mode screen you can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon s gt One click Mode Screen e Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears fT Preferences Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box il cae Opens this guide Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Import Documents or Images Tab Page 378 of 678 pages WelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Import Documents or Images Tab MP Navigator EX Scan Import Documents or Images Tab Point to Scan Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan Import Documents or Images tab Scan Photos and Documents Scan Import Documents or Images gt Photos Documents Platen eo SE E shonteendon vane M Preeren J e Photos Documents Platen Opens the Scan Import window Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window p EA Mode Switches to One click Mode screen In the One click Mode screen you can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the cor
333. he Platen using MP Navigator EX It allows you to scan the left and right halves of a document separately and combine them back into one image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using MP Navigator EX Page 676 of 678 pages Scan with One click In One click Mode MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving with a click of an icon One click Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e mail automatically Er Ke I 7 N i s XK jpg anor Scan and Correct Enhance Photos You can easily correct enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX You do not need to use other applications For details on how to use MP Navigator EX refer to Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals About Solution Menu Page 677 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Solution Menu About Solution Menu Quick Shortcut Solution Menu Solution Menu is a menu window that provides quick access from your desktop to Canon applications manuals and online product information Canon Solution Menu oHe ua Scanimport photos or documents Print photos or albums etc sl Go to a webpage with free and high E One Click to Photo Print FA quality materials j Change settings or find solutions to Get help for your Canon product or problems software g Register online Gi Login online bi Find informati
334. he Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify in the Scan Import window In the Scan Settings dialog box you can make advanced scan settings Document Type Color Document Document Sze Lezer Scanning Reschson 300 epi El Descreen F Reduce Showsbrough F Urshap Mask FI Remove gutter shadow Corect slanted document e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned Scanning photos Color Photo or Black and White Photo Scanning text documents Color Document Black and White Document or Text OCR Scanning magazines Magazine Color P important Toscan correctly select a document type that matches the document to be scanned e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Wie 850 inches 1 09850 Height 11 09 inches 1 00 11 65 Unts P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen You cannot select Auto Detect Multiple Documents or Auto Detect when Document Type is Text OCR e Scanning Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents s gt Resolution
335. he Select printer port check box and click Manual selection At the Select printer port window select the connection destination and then click OK Complete the installation Click Complete Turn on the machine and wait awhile until the connection is recognized This procedure installs the MP Drivers is complete Depending on the environment you are using a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed To complete the installation properly restart the computer P important a You can download the MP Drivers for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Related Topics Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Installing the MP Drivers Page 660 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Page 661 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on screen manuals from your computer Before uninstalling the on screen manuals exit all on screen manuals that are opening Windows All of the installed on screen manuals will be deleted at the same time 1 Click Start gt All Programs Programs in Windows 2000 gt Canon XXX Manual where XXX is your machine s name gt Uninstall
336. he folder click Browse Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Button Settings Tab Save Page 448 of 678 pages to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Select this to open the save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder file name and Exif information ES Note See Save Dialog Box for details Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Page 449 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX e Using images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on
337. he same size 5 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts Fit to Page copying Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is completed gt Important Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until copying is completed E9 Note You can set the print quality to Fast speed priority only when A4 or Letter sized plain paper Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 19 of 678 pages Fit to Page Copying Page 20 of 678 pages is selected for the page size and media type To set the print quality to Fast press and hold down the Color or Black button for 2 or more seconds in step 5 See To set the print quality to Fast speed priority To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button Q A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Page 21 of 678 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Scanning Scanning You can save scanned data on your computer and edit or process them with the supplied software application Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Preparing for Scanning with the Operation Panel Saving Scanned Data on the Computer A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Page 22 of 678 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Scanning gt Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Saving Scanned Data on the Computer This
338. heck 2 Set the scale to 100 Some applications do not display images clearly if the image is too small Check 3 If moire stripe pattern appears take the following measures and scan again e On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver select Magazine Color in Select Source e On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver set Descreen in Image Settings to ON Image Settings ES Note 1 If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo take the above measures and scan again e f you use MP Navigator EX set Document Type to Magazine Color or enable Descreen in the Scan Settings dialog box and scan again gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents Check 4 Check the monitor s color depth From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Appearance and Personalization gt Adjust screen resolution to open the Display Settings dialog box Set the color depth to Medium 16 bit or Highest 32 bit e Windows XP From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Display to open the Display Properties dialog box On the Settings tab set Colors to Medium 16 bit or Highest 32 bit e Windows 2000 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel gt Display to open the Display Properties dialog box On the Settings tab set Colors to High Color 16 bit or True Color 32 bit Check 5 Clean the Platen and Document Cover Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Check 6 If the
339. hen double click the Image Capture icon Click Options at the lower left of the scanner window select MP Navigator EX 3 in Application to launch when the scanner button is pressed then click OK To quit Image Capture select Quit Image Capture on the Image Capture menu P important If Options is not displayed select Preferences on the Image Capture menu click Scanner and click Use TWAIN software whenever possible to clear the option Then quit Image Capture and restart it Make sure that the machine is turned on Load the original on the Platen Glass ES Note a Refer to Placing Documents for how to load the original on the Platen Glass Press the SCAN button The settings configured by MP Navigator EX are applied when scanning Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 315 of 678 pages 5 tit To specify MP Navigator EX 3 0 If you are using Windows Vista The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the SCAN button In this case select MP Navigator EX Ver3 0 and click OK You can set MP Navigator EX to launch whenever pressing the SCAN button For details see For Windows Users If you are using Windows XP The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the SCAN button for the first time In this case specify MP Navigator EX Ver3 0 as the application software to use select Always use this program for this
340. hes None a Fades Correction rene Grain Correction Mediam High farticht Crerection P important Do not apply these functions to images without moire dust scratches or faded colors The color tone may be adversely affected See Image Settings for details and precautions on each function Note See Scanning in Advanced Mode to start ScanGear scanner driver in Advanced Mode tab and scan Adjusting the image brightness and color tone Set Image Adjustment to Auto Photo Magazine Newspaper or Document according to the document type ce ee ae ee Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correc Page 471 of 678 pages Sharpening slightly out of focus images Set Unsharp Mask to ON Reducing gradations and stripe patterns Set Descreen to ON ES Note Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect Reducing dust and scratches Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low Medium or High according to the degree of dust and scratches Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast Set Fading Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust
341. hes automatically when data is sent to the printer When launched the Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar ES Note To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab When Errors Occur The Canon lJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs e g if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low In such cases take the appropriate action as described Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Canon IJ Preview Page 297 of 678 pages AdvancedGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon IJ Preview Canon IJ Preview The Canon lJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout print order and number of pages You can also change the media type settings When you want to display a preview before printing open the printer driver setup window click the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab and check the Preview before printing check box When you do not want to display a preview before printing uncheck the check box Related Topic D
342. hotos Framing Photos You can add frames to images P important a You cannot add frames to images in Photo Print Stickers and Layout Print Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box C Apply to all images in the page Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed photos Note Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images ona Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Framing Photos Page 208 of 678 pages selected page at one time Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application Click Search frames to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply This function may not be available in some regions Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing frames Search frames will be displayed only if Album has been selected See Help for details on frames Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Dates on Photos Page 209 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Printing Printing Dates on Photos
343. i Delete Selected Paget Bi Pape IMG_0003 po Ueto Reset Saree Selected Pages Sarva Ad Pages Freh C Uvers Userhlamel Pictures WO Navigator DAID 01 ANIMS 0001 jpg e Rearrange Pages You can move the selected image outlined in orange i e Moves the selected image to the top lt e Moves the selected image up one page gt e Moves the selected image down one page gt i e Moves the selected image to the end E8 Note You can also drag and drop the image to rearrange the order e Delete Selected Pages Deletes the selected image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Create Edit PDF file Window e Add Page Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file E8 Note A password will be required to add a password protected PDF file e Undo Cancels the latest change made e Reset Cancels all the changes made e Save Selected Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box Specify the save settings Only the selected page is saved EA Note When multiple pages are selected a multiple page PDF file is created See Save as PDF file Dialog Box for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box Save All Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box Specify the save settings All PDF files in the list will be saved as one PDF file e Finish Closes the Create Edit PDF file window e Toolbar Rotate Left Rotates the page 90 degrees
344. ide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver Canon IJ Printer Driver The Canon lJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this machine The Canon lJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer Because different models support different print data formats you need a Canon lJ printer driver for the specific model you are using How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of the Canon lJ printer driver e To view all descriptions of a tab Click the Help button on each tab A dialog box opens displaying a description of each item on the tab You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked dialog box e To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to learn about and then click Help Alternatively when the Help button is found at the right end of the title bar click that button and then click the item you want to learn about A description of the item is displayed Related Topic How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals How
345. iginals gt Loading Originals Originals You Can Load m Loading Originals Load originals to copy or scan on the Platen Glass gt Important After loading the original be sure to close the Document Cover before starting to copy or scan When scanning from a computer using a software application you need to load the original in a different way For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 1 Load an original on the Platen Glass 1 Open the Document Cover gt Important Do not place any object on the Document Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction 2 Load an original WITH THE SIDE TO COPY OR SCAN FACING DOWN on the Platen Glass Align the corner of the original with the alignment mark Yy Important Do not place any objects weighing more than 4 4 Ib 2 0 kg on the Platen Glass Do not press or put weight on the original with pressure exceeding 4 4 Ib 2 0 kg Doing so may cause the scanner to malfunction or the Platen Glass to break The machine cannot scan the shaded area A 0 04 inches 1 mm from the edges of the Platen Glass Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Originals Page 54 of 678 pages 90 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Originals You Can Load Page 55 of 678 pages Basic Guide E e Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Original
346. il Send scanned images via e mail P important MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e mail software programs Windows Mail Windows Vista Outlook Express Windows XP Windows 2000 Microsoft Outlook If an e mail software program does not operate properly check that the program s MAPI is enabled To enable MAPI refer to the manual of the e mail software program 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images ES Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer s gt Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 Click Send then click Attach to E mail on the list Chek to select th image E i ee zoan Oore Al Specie Categones My Bos Scanned feperiod Images v Pora Imager Selected 2 O My Bex a 2O Ote pi u E Q Categeries 3 Q Prete v Ores Imagen Selected 1 O Potrat Q Others ais x ror i Bore Pant v Docume magat Send gt Baw Cod Imad P EdiConvert Selections H Jumo to Man Meru 4 Clvers Unerhlame Picbares WO Mawigatoe DANOI MO jog 3 Set save options as required Specify the destination folder and file name s gt Send via E mail Dialog Box Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Sending via E mail Send via a ya wr amai program and atiach
347. ile in the image data Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper from your application software be sure to select color management items from your application software For instructions refer to the manual of the application software you are using 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab l DR ack Sen Man 53 Page Setup af Etects A Martenance Preview betore parng 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with ICC Profiles Page 270 of 678 pages Click Matching tab and select None for Color Correction 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver and then Print Print from a program that cannot identity input ICC p
348. ing Off Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Maintenance Page 541 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance Maintenance s gt Cleaning Your Machine Aligning the Print Head Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning Your Machine Page 542 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine Cleaning Your Machine gt Cleaning s Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine gt Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning Page 543 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Machine gt Cleaning Cleaning This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your machine P important Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials for cleaning the exterior of the machine so as not to scratch the surface Be sure to use a soft cloth Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine as this may cause a malfunction or damage the machine s surface Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine gt Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Page
349. ing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Ink Cartridge Managing the Machine Power Reducing the Machine Noise Changing the Machine Operation Mode Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Machine Overview of the Printer Driver Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Appendix Deleting the Undesired Print Job Sharing the Printer on a Network Canon IJ Printer Driver Page 293 of 678 pages Advanced Gu
350. ing unless when explicitly allowed to by the PictBridge compliant device When disconnecting the USB cable between the PictBridge compliant device and machine follow the instructions given in the device s instruction manual Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals About PictBridge Print Settings MP270 series only Page 540 of 678 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only gt About PictBridge Print Settings MP270 series only About PictBridge Print Settings MP270 series only Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device This section describes the PictBridge function of the machine For the print settings on a PictBridge compliant device refer to the instructions given in the device s instruction manual ES Note n the following description names of setting items are given according to those used in Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Setting item names may be different depending on the brand or model of your device Some setting items explained below may not be available on some devices When you cannot change print settings on a device the machine prints images as follows Paper size 4 x 6 101 6 x 152 4 mm Paper type Photo Bordered Borderless Follow camera s setting Layout 1 up Print quality Standard Image Optimize The Photo optimizer pro func
351. int Head clean the Print Head deeply Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head so clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Clean the Print Head deeply 1 Press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until y appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The machine starts cleaning the Print Head deeply Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 2 minutes 3 Check the print head condition When the deep cleaning is completed the LED returns to the copy standby mode To check the print head condition print the nozzle check pattern See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern If the problem is not resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved replace the FINE Cartridge with a new one See Replacing a FINE Cartridge If the problem is still not resolved after replacing the FINE Cartridge contact the service center O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 63 of 678 pages Basic Guide Advanced Guide _ Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Aligning the Print Head m Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise
352. inter com Manuals Printing Does Not Start Page 599 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Does Not Start Printing Does Not Start e Check 1 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in then turn the machine on While the Power lamp is flashing green the machine is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green ES Note When printing large data such as a photo or graphics it may take longer to start printing While the Power lamp is flashing green the computer is processing data and sending it to the machine Wait until printing starts e Check 2 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer then check the followings e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the machine directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 3 Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer If there are any unnecessary print jobs delete them Deleting the Undesired Print Job e Check 4 Make sure that your machine s name is selected in the Print dialog box The machine will not print properly if you are using a driver for a different printer
353. into Se Crosshair arrow when it is positioned within a cropping frame Click and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame PERS e e Ea Note n Advanced Mode you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into Width and Height in Input Settings s Input Settings You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking cet Switch Aspect Ratio However ii Switch Aspect Ratio is not available when Output Size is Flexible Creating Multiple Cropping Frames In thumbnail view You can only create one cropping frame per image In whole image view Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in the Preview area The new cropping frame will be the Focus Cropping Frame and the old cropping frame will be the Unselected Cropping Frame Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 525 of 678 pages You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear scanner driver the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames When you create a new cropping frame it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame Note Create up to 12 cropping frames Scanning t
354. ions are exactly the same as those for the MP250 series unless otherwise described You may not be able to purchase some models in certain regions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing This Manual Page 94 of 678 pages Weblpigesel giil Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Printing This Manual Printing This Manual E Cancer HY series On screen Manual a ES 4 Back p eh Coments yy My Manual J Searchi jg E Pint x a Document Selection Ge Pmt sewa Select Target Current Document X Start Printing Print Preyew Documents to Be Printed Current Document J Canon sems C PN a wn Troubleshooting Describes m El Print inked documents e Click P to display the print pane to the left of the on screen manual E8 Note a Click to close or display the print pane When you click and then click Page Setup the Page Setup dialog box appears You can then easily set up the paper to be used for printing Click and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box When the dialog box is displayed select the printer to be used for printing The Print Setup tab also allows you to select the printer to be used After selecting the printer to be used click Properties to specify the print settings Click and then click Option Settings to display the Option Settings dialog box You can then set up the printing oper
355. ired to use this function This function is not available when images are automatically saved after scanning such as when scanning from the One click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine Note Select Password Security and set passwords in the Password Security Settings dialog box gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 395 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt View amp Use Window View amp Use Window Point to View amp Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box Scanned Imported Images Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View amp Use window Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer P important For PDF files only those created with MP Navigator EX are displayed You cannot display PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be displayed as well Carngores Edt Custom Categenes v Prete mab Sawise v Pas wart Geseit v Oha ma God Enf 4 Mme Hwe v Oomer mayt Guire Cod leaped Q Edt Curtom Categorie Forced tase 0 StordedSee insya 0 POF Fic Imager Ota mager v Ued bmagent Jumo to Man Meru CAUA erame Dictar M Navigator EX 2009_01 C2001 jeg 1 Display Setting Items 2 Image Hand
356. is section are for printing with Windows Vista operating system Ultimate Edition hereafter referred to as Windows Vista 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load A4 plain paper 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Open the printer driver setup window 1 Select Print on the File menu or the command bar in your software application The Print dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your machine s name is selected E8 Note If another printer s name is selected click and select your machine s name 3 Click Preferences or Properties on et ee Garwai Sasa Poros SS a m Mirae O5 Denrset Aias es mv 3 ian fed Peee ton Marge kiad Mate Yoon Pager Vass sh a 3 ow agempaste ream a 2 3 capemnge for manck 5 tee come Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Windows Page 31 of 678 pages 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings ES Note When the print object such as Business Document or Photo Printing is selected in Commonly Used Settings the items in Additional Features will be selected automatically The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also app
357. isplaying the Print Results before Printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 298 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Page 299 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying Copying gt Making Copies Using Useful Copy Functions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Making Copies Page 300 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Making Copies Making Copies For the basic procedure to make copies refer to Copying gt Reducing or Enlarging a Copy gt Using Useful Copy Functions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Page 301 of 678 pages NVelieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Making Copies gt Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Reducing or Enlarging a Copy 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load plain paper on the Rear Tray 3 Load the original on the Platen Glass gt Press the Paper button to select A4 or 8 5 x11 Plain Paper
358. k amp white copying You can also press this button to finalize your selection for the setting item 10 Fit to Page button Fit to Page lamp Enables the Fit to Page copy function You can copy the original automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the selected page size When the Fit to Page copy function is disabled you can make copies in the same size as the original 11 i Maintenance button Specifies the Maintenance code 12 Paper lamp Lights to indicate the page size and media type selected with the Paper button 13 Alarm lamp Lights or flashes orange when an error occurs such as paper out or ink out In the software applications or manuals the Black and Color buttons are collectively called the Start or OK button O O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals LED Display and Basic Operations Page 9 of 678 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Overview of the Machine gt LED Display and Basic Operations LED Display and Basic Operations You can use the machine to make copies or perform maintenance operations without a computer This section describes the LED display and basic operations on the Operation Panel The number 1 appears on the LED normally when turning on the power The LED display indicates the machine status as follows Machine Status LED Display hile copying Number of copies flashing While printing scanning or performing J
359. k level of it may not be correct In such case refer to the ink level information only as a guide With the Ink Lamps on the Operation Panel Make sure that the LED is in the copy standby mode You can confirm the ink status with the Ink lamps 3 fo O amp 1 Alarm lamp 2 Color Ink lamp 3 Black Ink lamp Color Ink lamp or Black Ink lamp lights Ink is low You can continue printing for a while but we recommend you to have a new FINE Cartridge available Color Ink lamp or Black Ink lamp flashes while Alarm lamp lights e If E 1 6 appears on the LED ink has run out Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide e lf E 1 3 appears on the LED ink may have run out Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Color Ink lamp or Black Ink lamp flashes while Alarm lamp is off The function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled With the Computer Screen You can confirm the ink status with the printer status monitor Windows or Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Windows acintosh Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Checking the Ink Status ap twaa MED seers Prete UBE a o pees bh Heie wie Level irfonnaoe I Q ragana Van Gheeh diate A 1 m Limin Font aune Press the Abau iek bonon 10 wew Me information sbost the bnk tark Press the Update bation to check the current romainrg ith eww
360. le name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed P important If you select this function you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files ES Note If an application to start is specified in Application Settings the scanned image opens in the specified application e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images Select Auto JPEG Exif TIFF or BMP Auto is displayed and selected by default when Document Type is Auto Mode P important When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto the file format may differ Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 441 of 678 pages depending on how you place the document See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents Large documents such as A4 size photos that cannot be placed away from the edges arrow alignment mark of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is Auto In that case select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned You cannot select JPEG Exif when Color Mode is Black and White EA Note When Auto is selected files are saved in the following formats according to the document type Photos postcards CD DVD and business cards JPEG Magazines newspapers and text documents PDF You can change th
361. lect the paper size Select Youkei 4 Youkei 6 Comm Env 10 or DL Env in the Envelope Size Setting dialog box and then click OK 6 Set the orientation To print the addressee horizontally select Landscape for Orientation 7 Select the print quality Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality 8 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the information is printed on the envelope Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 255 of 678 pages Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page 256 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Displaying the Print Results before Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing You can display and check the print result before printing The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab Canon MP270 series Printer Printing Preferences z FR cack Sep D Han B Page Setup of tects AF Martenance Medea Tipe Plan Paper l Ei Paper Source Rese Tray lt Prrt Quality Hh Sandsd D ia Pign Paper Color rtensty Lemar 8 5 11 215 279 denn amp Age Manual Set
362. lider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image e Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image e Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image Move the slider to the right to soften the image e Show through Removal Removes show through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color Adjust the show through level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image Move the slider to the right to increase the show through removal effect e Defaults Resets all adjustments brightness contrast sharpness blur and show through removal e Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image e Save Selected Image Saves the corrected images selected e Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list e Exit Closes the Correct Enhance Images window Correction Enhancement Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 411 of 678 pages C Users UrerMame Pictured MP Navigator DONO Ot 011003 jpg e Face Brightener Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened You can adjust the effect level using the slider
363. ling Buttons 3 Toolbar 4 Thumbnail Window 5 Selected Images Area Display Setting Items e Scan Import Click this when you want to scan photos documents magazines and other printed materials The Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View _Use Window Page 396 of 678 pages Scan Import window opens Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window My Box Scanned Imported Images Displays folders of images grouped by year year month and year month date in My Box in tree view Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right Image date is the scanned captured or updated date Specify Folder Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail window to the right Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name allowing you to rename it Recently Saved Images Scanned Imported Images and images that have been Attached to E mail or Sent to Application recently are displayed in tree view by date Select a Month Date Year folder to display images by date in the Thumbnail window to the right Image date is the scanned or sent date Search The advanced search options opens s gt Searching Images Jump to Main Men SHME eben ben __ Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu Image Handling Buttons Image Handling Buttons Specify what to do with the selected images See the correspon
364. ll look like before you actually print the document Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes The documents that are currently displayed are printed Print Selected Documents You can select and print the documents that you want printed 1 5 From Select Target select Selected Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select the title check boxes of the documents to be printed Note When you select the Automatically select documents in lower hierarchies check box the check boxes of all document titles found in the lower hierarchies are selected Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed Execute print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
365. ll the images displayed in the list OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Manual Tab Select to correct manually Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast or to sharpen the entire image Use Correct Enhance to correct enhance specific areas Adjust Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 173 of 678 pages CA Users User Name gitljpg Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image Move the slider to the right to soften the image Show through Removal Remov
366. lly This button is displayed only when My Box Scanned Imported Images or Specify Folder is displayed EA Note Classification may take time if there are many images to classify Selected Images Area Cancel All Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area e ii Cancel Selection Cancels the selection of the target image outlined in orange in the Selected Images area e Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed Related Topic Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Create Edit PDF file Window Page 400 of 678 pages WelFisesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Create Edit PDF file Window Create Edit PDF file Window Click PDF in the View amp Use window then click Create Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create Edit PDF file window In the Create Edit PDF file window you can add delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files created with MP Navigator EX P important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions If apassword protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX Rearrange Pages i lt lt gt gt
367. lor adjustments when scanning ScanGear scanner driver can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application Starting from MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode Screen Follow these steps to start ScanGear scanner driver from the Navigation Mode screen of MP Navigator EX 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 2 Point to Scan Import and click Photos Documents Platen The Scan Import window opens 3 Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox then click Open Scanner Driver V Canon MP Navigator EX oo ES Follow the procedure below to scan photos ot documents t Poefecerce H A Cl te 3 a home a gt Posunenis Plaisa o Place Documests Open the document cover and place the photo or Gooumert onthe piten nt Color Proto lt f Click Open Scassor Dever _ Scanner dover Scaneae window opens Using the scanner diver allows pou ts pocty he advanced teary br arero Darome the serokion ocior tore oic Jumo to Man Meru The ScanGear scanner driver screen appears One click Mode Screen Follow these steps to start ScanGear scanner driver from the One click Mode screen of MP Navigator EX 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the One click Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX 2 Click the corresponding icon The corresponding dialog box opens Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 3 Select the Use the sc
368. lsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Page 38 of 678 pages Basic Guide Bi Suide Contents gt Other Usages gt Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only You can connect the PictBridge compliant device to this machine with a USB cable that is recommended by the device s manufacturer and print saved images directly For details on how to print saved images connecting the PictBridge compliant device refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide For details on the print settings on the PictBridge compliant device refer to the instruction manual supplied with the device Connectable devices Any PictBridge compliant device can be connected to this machine regardless of the manufacturer or model as long as it is compliant with the PictBridge Standard E8 Note PictBridge is the Standard to print your photos directly without using a computer connecting a device such as a digital still camera digital camcorder or camera equipped mobile phone l C PictBridge A device with this mark is PictBridge compliant Printable image data format This machine accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system and PNG files Exif 2 2 2 21 compliant O amp Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Useful Softwa
369. ly To copy by operating the machine Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the machine F gt Copying To print from a PictBridge Confirm by using your PictBridge compliant device compliant device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only To print from a computer Confirm by using the printer driver gt Printing with Easy Setup e MP250 series only To copy by operating the machine Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the machine gt Copying To print from a computer Confirm by using the printer driver E gt Printing with Easy Setup e Check 2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected according to the media type and printing data using the printer driver Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing If you notice blurs or uneven colors increase the print quality setting and try printing again Confirm the print quality setting using the printer driver Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data EA Note For MP270 series only You cannot change the print quality setting from a PictBridge compliant device Check 3 If the problem is not resolved there may be other causes See also the sections below Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Colors Are Unclear s gt Lines Are Misaligned gt Printed Paper
370. ly 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the document is printed with the adjusted color balance P important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Cyan Magenta and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method s gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness Page 275 of 678 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors The following sample shows the print result when the brightness specification is changed Light is selected Normal is selected Dark is selected The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual col
371. m Manuals Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 578 of 678 pages Printer Connection Make sure that the pnnter is connected to the computer and tum on the printer STEP 3 Setup Printer Connection Print Head Alignment Recommended Completion STEP 4 Information The printer is not detected Check the connection Help Cancel If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged into the USB port of the machine and is connected to the computer and then follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers EA Note In Windows Vista The printer is not detected Check the connection may be displayed depending on the computer you use In this case wait for a while If you still cannot proceed to the next step follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers 1 Click Cancel on the Printer Connection screen 2 Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen 3 Click Back on the screen that appears next 4 Click Exit on the PIXMA XXX screen then remove the CD ROM 5 Turn the machine off 6 Restart the computer 7 Make sure that you have no application software running 8 Insert the CD ROM again then perform Easy Install to install the MP Drivers In other cases Follow the procedure described in your setup manual to reinstall the MP Drivers If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly uninstall the
372. m ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with the Bundled Application Software Page 105 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with the Bundled Application Software s gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX s gt Printing Photos Creating an Album gt Printing Calendars Printing Stickers Printing Layout s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Questions and Answers Photo Print Settings s gt Other Settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 106 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily i Canon Eary PhetoPrint EX oL file Edt View Help Selart the Kem you want to create from the many Select LOracy to access saved kams Photo Print L amp p e a Seo a cos w tickers P important a Easy PhotoPrint EX does not support Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT4 Easy PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers It does not support some printers including Canon compact printers SELPHY CP series I
373. m ManualsPrinter com Manuals Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 286 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 287 of 678 pages Adna aid Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images It is specially designed to compensate for color shift overexposure and underexposure PASS The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Optimizer PRO Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab T Qsc Seto S Man 5B Page Seve oF Efect AJ Martenance Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box Images within each page are optimized on an image by image basis E8 Note Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been processed such as being cropped or rotated In this case the entire page will be treated as a single image to be optimized 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the images will be printed with color compensation Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
374. m a computer However this may result in lower print quality We recommend using plain paper for a trial print O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Cannot Use Page 52 of 678 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Cannot Use m Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results but also the machine to jam or malfunction Folded curled or wrinkled paper Damp paper Paper that is too thin weighing less than 17 lb 64 g m 2 Paper that is too thick weighing more than 28 Ib 105 g m 2 except for Canon genuine paper Paper thinner than a postcard including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size when printing on paper smaller than A5 Picture postcards Postcards affixed with photos or stickers Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive Any type of paper with holes Paper that is not rectangular Paper bound with staples or glue Paper with adhesives Paper decorated with glitter etc O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Originals Page 53 of 678 pages spe Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Originals Loading Or
375. m the options displayed by clicking the button or enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi in 1 dpi increments gt Resolution e Output Size Select an output size Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying Select Add Delete to set custom size and save it as a new output size option e Flexible You can specify the output resolution and scale and adjust the cropping frame In thumbnail view Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned When no cropping frame is displayed each frame is scanned individually In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed the entire Preview area will be scanned When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned Note To enlarge reduce the scanned image enter values into 4 Width and Oo Height in Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Output Settings Page 503 of 678 pages Output Settings or specify a value by 1 for The maximum value available for depends on the Output Resolution can be specified for up to 19200 dpi the maximum available output resolution e Paper Size L etc amp Monitor Size 1024 x 768 pixels etc Width height and scale cannot be specified The preview image will be cropped according to the selected output size and resolution The p
376. m to the printer P important Incase an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer the error message of Canon lJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print server system For regular printing Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client system Ea Note Install the printer driver from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the machine on the print server system and each of the client systems according to the OS of each system You cannot share this printer with Macintosh computers Related Topic Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Settings on Print Server Page 668 of 678 pages Nelifielecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Print Server Settings on Print Server When you use the printer on a network set up the printer driver for sharing on the server system The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows 1 Install the printer driver on the print server system For details on installation instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started 2 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and
377. magazines newspapers text documents and CD DVD A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD DVD labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents ES Note To reduce moire click another icon in One click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One click tab and set Document Type to Magazine Scan Settings e Enable Auto Photo Fix Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically This function is available when Auto or JPEG Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings P important When Save as type is Auto the base color tone of the following types of documents may change from the source since they are corrected as photos In that case deselect the checkbox and scan Postcards and business cards Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 416 of 678 pages Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos depending on how you place the document In that case deselect the checkbox and scan ES Note If you select a format other than JPEG Exif for
378. maintenance operations m Da ey flashing in order When an error occurs le E and number appear alternately For details on the error codes refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide P and number appear alternately An error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide While the Scanning Unit Cover is open Fl flashing E8 Note When a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera is connected to the machine C appears on the LED MP270 series only Number of Copies When copying starts the specified number of copies appears on the LED While copying is in progress the number on the LED flashes and decreases by one to indicate the remaining number of copies to be made Each time you press the button the number on the LED increases by one When F appears the Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals LED Display and Basic Operations number of copies is set to 20 Press the button again to return to 1 Maintenance Codes To perform maintenance of the machine press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until the desired code appears on the LED and then press the Black or Color button Maintenance Code Operation Prints the nozzle check pattern Cleans the Print Head Cleans the Print Head deeply Prints the print head alignme
379. maton related to Canon inkjet printer OS version and language informaiton Printer s ID number installation date and time ink use informaton number of sheets printed and maintenance information in this survey we will not collect or send any information about your computer other Man that above or any of your personal information For this reason trom the information that is sent to us we are unable to identity specific customers We are theretore unable to respond to requests 10 disclose any collected information The above information will be collected on this computer at intervals of about one month information will be collecied automatically requiring no customer operation if you agree that we collect and send the information above and that we cannot disclose any collected information click Agree Otherwise click Do not agree if you wish to turn off this program click Turn off This will disable the program and no further survey will be made Turn off lt e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again E Note f you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will not be se
380. mera images JPEG features high compression rates JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved and cannot be returned to their original state JPEG is not available for black and white images Exif Standard File Extension jpg A file format supported by many digital cameras It adds information such as the date of image capture camera model shutter speed shooting mode and comments to JPEG files The file format version must be Exif 2 2 or later in order to print on a Direct Print compatible printer TIFF Standard File Extension tif A file format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications Some TIFF files are incompatible TIFF is suitable for editing saved images E Note MP Navigator EX supports the following TIFF file formats Uncompressed black and white binary Uncompressed RGB 8 bits per channel Uncompressed YCC 8 bits per component Uncompressed RGB 16 bits per channel Uncompressed YCC 16 bits per component Uncompressed Grayscale PDF Standard File Extension pdf A file format developed by Adobe Systems It can be used on various computers and operating systems Therefore PDF files can be exchanged between people who use different operating systems fonts etc regardless of the differences P important Only PDF files created with MP Navigator EX are supported PDF files created or edited in other applications are not supp
381. ministrator privilege 2 Click Control Panel then Printer under Hardware and Sound In Windows XP click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Control Panel then Printers 3 Right click the Canon XXX Printer icon then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX Printer appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s If the port setting is not correct reinstall the MP Drivers or change the port setting according to the interface you are using e Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the machine directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 4 Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed correctly Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive and perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers to install again e Check 5 Check the status of the device on your computer Follow the pro
382. mpleted Note To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 16 of 678 pages Copying Documents m Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter You can switch the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter This setting is useful if you usually load Letter sized paper in the Rear Tray regardless of the page size indication A4 on the Operation Panel or vice versa 1 Press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until d appears 2 Press the Black button to select A4 or the Color button to select 8 5 x 11 Letter EA Note When you switch the page size to A4 or 8 5 x 11 Letter load paper of the selected size regardless of the size indicated on the Operation Panel When the page size is set to A4 load A4 plain paper or photo paper When the page size is set to 8 5 x 11 Letter load Letter sized plain paper or photo paper O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Photos Basic Guide E E Contents gt Copying gt Copying Photos Copying Photos This section describes the procedure to copy a printed photo on 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper You need to prepare Printed photos Paper for photo printing See Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare for copying a photo 1 Turn on the power See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper
383. mpression Standard or Low High Compression When Save as type is PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Exif Settings When Save as type is JPEG Exif you can input Exif information into the file to be saved Exif Settings Dialog Box e Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening editing and printing created PDF files Setting Passwords for PDF Files Note This function is available only when Save as type is PDF PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page e Add to This is displayed when you select PDF Add Page for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are added To change the file click Browse to specify another one P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well e Rotate Left 90 Rotate Right 90 Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter clockwise or clockwise Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90 or Rotate Right 90 e File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 characters When saving multiple files 4 digits are appended to each file name e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the
384. mputer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 3 Make sure that your machine s name is selected in the Print dialog box Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh ME S Error Number 1700 Is Displayed e See E 0 8 in An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action METT ink Info Number 1688 Is Displayed e See E 1 6 in An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action BETTIE ink into Number 1686 Is Displayed e See E 1 3 in An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action ME Error Number 2001 Is Displayed MP270 series only e See E 0 9 in An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action MET Error Number 2002 Is Displayed MP270 series only e See E 1 9 in An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action M other Error Messages e Check If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor check the following Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 613 of 678 pages e Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk
385. n For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application m For Mac OS X v 10 5 x Make sure that the machine is turned on See Operation Panel e Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load A4 plain paper m Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension a n Open the Print dialog box Select Print on the File menu in your software application The Print dialog box will appear E8 Note If the dialog box below appears click f Down arrow Printer Canon M7270 series Peretz Standard tl ore Preeew Cacti Gee a Specify the required print settings 1 Make sure that your machine s name is selected in Printer 2 Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size Here we select A4 3 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application Printing Documents Macintosh Comes Mi Colured Pages OA fren 1 g Paser Gre At CELLESD 2 Ovveetation te Te 3 frit header ard footer D C a Co G 4 Select the media type of the loaded paper in Media Type Here we select Plain Paper E8 Note If you select the wrong media type the machine may not print with the proper print quality 5 Select the print quality in Print Quality Her
386. n for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window Windows XP or Printers window Windows 2000 The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in the network O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page 671 of 678 pages Nelifirjecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Restrictions on Printer Sharing Restrictions on Printer Sharing These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment Check the restrictions for the environment you are using When You Are Sharing a Printer in a Network e A print completion message may be displayed To disable the message display follow the procedure below e In Windows Vista Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system Open Run as administrator gt Server Properties from the displayed File menu Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e In Windows XP or Windows 2000 Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window Windows XP or the Printers window Windows 2000 on the
387. n languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images e Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist e Defaults Restores the default settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box Page 425 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you scan from Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One click tab or from Save in the One click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Input Exif information You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails 4 Seve the mage to the speotied folder Save as hype CE Es Sne Rotate ket 97 Rotate Foote 0
388. n message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Envelope Page 254 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing an Envelope Printing an Envelope For details on how to load an envelope into the machine refer to Loading Paper in the Rear Tray in the manual Basic Guide The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows 1 Fold down the paper support 2 Load an envelope into the machine Fold down the envelope flap Orient the envelope so that the flap is on the left and the folded surface is facing down and load in the rear tray 3 Open the printer driver setup window 4 Select the media type Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Envelope x Canca MP220 series Printer Printing Preferences GR Cusck Senp E Main 3 Page Setup oA Efecte Ab Martenance EA Prete Prrerg A hi Preview before painting Addtonal Festures Fete 190 degrees Meda Type Porter Paper Size Envekpe Metter 5107 X Onentation Potrat Landscape Pree Quality Paper Source Sandard i Ree Try l Copies 1 0 3 E Aways Bret wth Curert Semings Deas 5 Se
389. n the One click Mode screen to open the PDF dialog box a SS Scan photos or documents and save then as POF files Sean Setiegs Documert Tygo Decurere zj Color Mode Coce Documeg Sze Letter g Reschen Wg Specfy Save Settings Atomaticaly save the mage to you computer ater scanning a Fie rane C Save as type Formato Post SR Siven CAUses Userame Pictures MP Navigste fowo F Sawe to a Subfoider wth Qurert Date D Open the sare dalog box ater scanning the mage Popheation Settings Open with Hone Open the Mew amp Use dalog box Best Sg E Start scanning by clicking the one chck button Scan Settings e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Custom Size Setting HS Wich 850 inches 1 00850 Hogt 11 09 inches 1 00 11 65 ues P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals PDF Dialog Box Page 429 of 678 pages document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark
390. n the Platen then select Document Type gt Placing Documents Quae TTT Fretoeroocumente rwn Pinco Dacumosts Open the document cover and place the photo or Document Type chouner onthe platen nad Coe Prete D See 2 Setect Docesent Typo Faso Detect Mubple Documert Sees tees a ciate tenant Kea ened Reschtion Xodi soen Click Scan O Use he soare diver p dumo to Man Mere E9 Note When you select Magazine Color the Descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes longer than usual To disable the Descreen function deselect the Descreen checkbox in the Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Photos and Documents Page 326 of 678 pages Scan Settings dialog box Select Text OCR to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP Navigator EX Color scanning is not available for Text OCR To scan in color use OCR in One click and scan with Color Mode set to Color 4 Click Specify to set the document size and scanning resolution as required When setting is completed click OK s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents P important When scanning a large document such as an A4 size photo align its corner with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the platen and specify the document size in the Scan Settings dialog box 5 Click Scan Mp Cinn MP Noviguter EX Follows the procedure below to
391. ndow click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print ea Auto Photo Fix or A RedEye Conecton 22 Face Shapenet os Diza Face Smocthing CAVE User Namegisljpg 1 Toolbar Toolbar Q g Zoom In Zoom Out Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the page E Full Screen Displays the entire image in Preview Compare Displays the Compare Images window You can compare the images before and after the correction enhancement side by side The image before the correction enhancement is displayed on the left and the image after the correction enhancement is displayed on the right Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 171 of 678 pages 2 Task Area Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs Click Auto or Manual to display the corresponding tab Auto Tab Select to correct automatically Manual Auto Photo Fix or fa RedEye Conection QQ Feesn Ls Ge Week exif Storg 9S Digtal Face Smcething O poy io at images CAUsers User Namelgitljpg Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing Select this option in Color correction for printi
392. ned output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels Note Save up to 10 items An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range Enter a value within the setting range ES Note Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified on the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab 3 Invert aspect ratio This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible Click this button to rotate the cropping frame Click again to return it to the original orientation e Adjust cropping frames You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area If an area is not specified the document will be scanned at the document size Auto Crop If an area is specified only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab eK i v ran x x J e Image corrections e Fading correction Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast e Backlight correction Corrects photos that have been shot against light e Gutter shadow correction Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets P important For precautions on using this function see Gutter Shadow Correction in Image Settings Advanced Mode tab Color Pattern
393. ner 29 Face Sharpener Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 165 of 678 pages Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 166 of 678 pages AJS Gilets Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Blemish Remover Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles 1 Select photos
394. ness Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Page 535 of 678 pages e Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image thus softening the image Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Resolution DPI Enter the resolution Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi gt Resolution Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your document e Reset Click to restore the original settings 6 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appears on the right Drag to specify the scan area 7 Click Next and follow the instructions Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Page 536 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only s gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Page 537 of 678 p
395. ng Does Not Start Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed gt Mies writing Error Output Error Communication Error Print Results Not Satisfactory Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 643 of 678 pages WNeleiesel gia Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Instructions for Use Printer Driver Instructions for Use Printer Driver This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver Restrictions on the Printer Driver e With some applications the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled In this case use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software e If the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface language the driver screen may not be displayed properly e Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties If you change any of the items you will not be able to use the following functions correctly Also if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibit EMF spooling such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor the following functions will not operate e Preview before printing on the Main tab e Prevent loss of print data in the Print
396. ng Keywords to Find a Document You can enter a keyword to search for a target document All documents in the currently displayed on screen manual are searched ee EA lojes q back pd Uj Coetents yy MyM _ Copying _ Copying Docurserts 2 Copying Photos L Feto Page Copying 2 Saving Scanned Data on the Computer D Parting Photos Easy Photo Prnt EX _ Using Vatous Functions of Easy PhotoPart _ Perting Dooumerts Windows _ Preng Doourerts Macitosh a _ Useful Software Appbcanons we d Ca D Meda Types You Can Use va _ When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting 1 Examining the Norde Check Patien es mar f 4 L Replacing a FINE Catrdge 2 Tps on How to Use Your Machine Bertin Thin Aine t m 1 Click aes The search pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual E8 Note Click 45h to close or display the search pane 2 Enter a keyword In Keyword enter a keyword for the item to be checked When you want to enter multiple keywords insert a space between the keywords ES Note You can enter up to 10 search keywords or up to 255 characters Uppercase and lowercase are not discriminated The program can also search for keywords that contain spaces A convenient way of quickly finding a document to be read is to enter keywords as described below To learn how to operate a function you are using
397. ng on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ct Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 172 of 678 pages shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG For Photo Print you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes Note For Photo Print you can also correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can adjust the effect level using the slider Apply to all images Automatically corrects a
398. ngs to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box leona Opens this guide P important 1 The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or Custom dialog box When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data specify Document Type do not select Auto Mode Related Topic Easy Scanning with One click Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 415 of 678 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Auto Scan Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Auto Scan Dialog Box Click Auto Scan on the Custom Scan with One click tab or click Auto in the One click Mode screen to open the Auto Scan dialog box Sean a Sean documents wth autcenatically adusted settings and save them to your lt gt computer Sean Seige EE Enable Auto Photo Foc Sawe Settings Fje name wo o a Save as hpe Ago Stns Saven C Albert Wseetlame Petens WP Nergete Browse 7 Save to a Subfolder wth Qurrent Date E Ran scanning by cheking the one chck button P important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly In that case click another icon in One click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One click tab and specify the document type or size Documents other than photos postcards business cards
399. niatures P important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX ZoomBrowser EX or Digital Photo Professional the folder tree area will not be displayed The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails 3 Click the image you want to print The number of copies appears as 1 below the clicked image while the selected image itself will appear in the selected image area E8 Note a To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 112 of 678 pages tal Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click in Delete All Imported Images To print two or more copies of an image click a Up arrow until the number of copies you want is reached To reduce the number of copies shown in the box click Di Down arrow a You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name EA Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O a Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting the Paper Page 113 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Pri
400. ning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Auto Scan Mode Tab Auto Scan Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen and clicking a button In Auto Scan Mode documents are automatically detected You do not need to specify cropping frames or make image corrections D ScanGear 2 2 3 Base Mode advances Had Place paper and press Scan button e Supported Documents Photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and CD DVD P important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly In that case specify the document type or size on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab and scan again Documents other than photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and CD DVD Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos s gt Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Reflective CD DVD labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents EA Note Scan from the Basic Mode Tab or Advanced Mode Tab to reduce moire e
401. nning the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 421 of 678 pages Input Exif information After scanning you can set the passwords in the Save dialog box s gt Setting Passwords for PDF Files Application Settings Open with You can select whether to open the View amp Use window or Explorer after saving the images Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings When Save as type is Auto a confirmation appears Click Open Manual to open this guide if it is installed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Page 422 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Scan Settings Dialog Box Make advanced settings for scanning with one click or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify in a dialog box for making scan settings gt Speoty advanced settings
402. ns and enhancements in the Correct Enhance Images window P important For Photo Print if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box you cannot correct enhance images E8 Note See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window Auto Photo Fix This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash Using the Red Eye Correction Function Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background Using the Face Brightener Function Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo s gt Using the Face Sharpener Function Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles s gt Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles Using the Blemish Remover Function Image Adjustment You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 152 of 678 pages Adjusting Images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 153 of 678 pages NelFilesel
403. nsity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed No adjustment Higher Intensity The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity on the Main tab and click Set Canca MP270 series Printer Printing Preferences T ack Seno Man 5B Page Setup af Efecte A Martenance Ei Paper Source Rose Troy j The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust intensity Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies darkens the colors Moving the slider to the left dilutes brightens the colors You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Intensity Page 278 of 678 pages 0 a 8 amp low High 0 a Q E Low High 0 E Q pa Low High Sy ABCDEF 1234567 foes Nomai z Sampie Type A i a H O Q oO Senden a me Qo View Color Patter z P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image data is print
404. nt sheet Scans the print head alignment sheet to align the Print Head automatically Prints the current head position adjustment values Cleans the Paper Feed Roller Cleans the inside of the machine Switches the size of paper loaded in the Rear Tray between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter This setting is used for making copies Sets the machine to prevent paper abrasion Error Codes See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter Refer to Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide When an error occurs E and number appear alternately on the LED to indicate the error code e g E 1 6 flashing in order Note For details on the error codes refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide If an error code with P appears an error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 10 of 678 pages LED Display and Basic Operations Page 11 of 678 pages A Page top Downloaded fr
405. nt EX is installed it adds a toolbar to your Internet Explorer screen The toolbar is available whenever Internet Explorer is running The clip function for example allows you to clip desired parts of web pages and edit them to print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Useful Software Applications Page 41 of 678 pages ale mea 8 x Lew basn Fa kee wan fates Took sap Canos Cany WebPrnt EX dprie gt ower OP hano ETE Own a Gra wann am EER GI XXXXXXXXXXXX z teineen gt 2 A quae naX Aw 2D Om For details on printing web pages click ve Help to view the online help Note Notes for installation of Easy WebPrint EX If Easy WebPrint EX is not installed the guidance for installation of Easy WebPrint EX may appear from the taskbar on the desktop To install Easy WebPrint EX click the displayed guidance and follow the instructions on the screen You can also install Easy WebPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM To install Easy WebPrint EX select Easy WebPrint EX in Custom Install To install Easy WebPrint EX on your computer Internet Explorer 7 or later is required and the computer must be connected to the Internet 9 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Paper Originals Page 42 of 678 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper Originals Loading Paper Originals This section describes types of paper or originals you can load h
406. nt automatically from the second time onward and the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later e To stop sending the information Click Turn off The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is stopped and the information will not be sent To resume the survey see Changing the setting e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 1 Stop the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Changing the setting 2 Select Applications from the Go menu and double click the Canon Utilities folder then the Inkjet Extended Survey Program folder 3 Place the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program app file into the Trash 4 Restart the computer Empty the Trash and restart your computer Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 616 of 678 pages e Changing the setting To display the confirmation screen every time the printer usage information is sent or to resume surveying follow the procedure below 1 Select Applications from the Go menu and double click the Canon Utilities folder then the Inkjet Extended Survey Program fol
407. nt of the FINE Cartridge Holder blocked Cancel printing from your computer turn off the machine Then clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the FINE Cartridge Holder from moving and turn on the machine again P important Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine The machine may not print out properly if you touch it If the problem is not resolved contact the service center e 6000 Is Displayed If any object is placed in front of the machine remove it Open the Paper Output Tray gently then turn the power off and back on Four Digit Alphanumeric and Printer error has occurred Is Displayed Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 611 of 678 pages RMT writing Error Output Error Communication Error e Check 1 If the Power lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the machine on While the Power lamp is flashing green the machine is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver In the following instructions XXX signifies your machine s name 1 Log on as a user account with ad
408. ntal lines tables Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document e Enable Auto Photo Fix When scanning with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically This function is available when Auto or JPEG Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings on the Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box P important When Save as type is Auto the base color tone of the following types of documents may change from the source since they are corrected as photos In that case deselect the checkbox and scan Postcards and business cards Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos depending on how you place the document In that case deselect the checkbox and scan Note If you select a format other than JPEG Exif for Save as type and then select this checkbox a message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto e Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist This function may not work properly depending on the document language Only text documents written i
409. nter properties dialog box b Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 594 of 678 pages 3 Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and click OK tom 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility s gt Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 3 Select Custom Settings in the pop up menu 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and click OK Check 10 Is the paper scratched by other loaded paper Depending on the media type the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from the Rear Tray In this case load one sheet at a time Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Back of the Paper Is Smudged Page 595 of 678 pages ASA AT Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Back of the Paper Is Smudged Back of the Paper Is Smudged e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine Routine Maintenance E Note When performing borderless printing duplex printing or too much printing
410. nting Stops Before It Is Completed Page 601 of 678 pages Nelieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Check 1 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time the Print Head may overheat To protect the Print Head the machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing In this case interrupt your print session at a convenient time and turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes Additionally if the machine has been printing graphics or photos with intense colors continuously over a period of time the machine may stop printing to protect the Print Head In this case printing will not resume automatically Turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes Caution The Print Head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the machine Never touch the Print Head or nearby components Check 2 Is the paper loaded Make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray If the machine has run out of paper load paper Check 3 Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations Printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the machine and the computer to process during which the machine may appear to have stopped operating In addition when printing data that uses
411. nting with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting the Paper Eroon Selecting the Paper 1 Click Select Paper The Select Paper screen appears a Exif Print ates Photo Paper Pro lt g Pacoima Pe toda ane Glorty Photo Paper Motie Photo Poper 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer See Help for details The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type ES Note You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise gt Printing Vivid Photos s gt Reducing Photo Noise See Help for details on the Select Paper screen O i Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 114 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Printing Printing 1 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears Select the layat you want lo pent Check the Preview and cick the Print button Pra a Exif Print ARn a ela m ES i P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears
412. nuals Page 234 of 678 pages Scaled Printing Page 235 of 678 pages Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page Layout Printing Page 236 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Page Layout Printing Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver T asc Senp E an 3 Poze Seo of Becta AF Martenance El Page Sze latier 8511 amp Orientation A 5 Pory A Landscape Rotate 180 degrees E Parer Peover Sze Letea Longas aping Tos Spectr Maran 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete 4 Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order If necessary click Specify specify the following settings
413. nuals Searching Images Page 348 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Useful MP Navigator EX Functions gt Searching Images MP Navigator EX Searching Images In the View amp Use window of the Navigation Mode screen you can search images saved on your computer and open them in MP Navigator EX Opened images can be printed edited etc E8 Note Search images in My Box Scanned Imported Images Recently Saved Images or a selected folder and its subfolders You can also specify folder and search in Specify Folder See Starting MP Navigator EX to start MP Navigator EX Check to zeleci the image ET Pretecences_ 2 amed enam Owe AI Specie Categones j Edt Custom Cotegores TA a SS ao Seach we IO Wy Bor earned imported mazes File Hone v Otar wayekl A wrd on phrase nthe fie vE Ceg 2 Unctossfied Moo vO Modhed tute V Wen v amet waert VW 12009 gt o GumenCad ways vO aneidter gt Pomas lmaperd V woes gt StontedSee lager Y Mote Ateanced Opon gt FOF imga A wad ce phease n the fe B Et gt Otar waro E POF tee Y Ued mayek Care zerctive Marchal catesa O Match ary oaia R Jumo to Man Meru Calker herlame DicsareA MD Navigator EX0 01 08 001 jeg Quick Search In Kol Text box on the Toolbar enter a word or phrase included in the file name Exif information or PDF te
414. o change the media type appears select a media type from the list and click OK 3 Check the paper size Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Borderless Printing Page 229 of 678 pages Check the Page Size list When you want to change select another page size from the list The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing 4 Adjust the amount of extension from the paper If necessary adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider Moving the slider to the right makes the amount larger and moving the slider to the left makes the amount smaller It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases i Q H P important When you set the slider at the rightmost position the back side of the paper may become smudged 5 Complete the setup Click OK The data will be printed without any margins on the paper P important When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected the size is automatically changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing When High Resolution Paper T Shirt Transfers or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab you cannot perform borderless printing When Borderless is selected the Printer Paper Size Staple Side when Duplex Printing is not selected settings and the Stamp Background button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are unavailable Print quali
415. ocess over from the beginning Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 654 of 678 pages Updating the MP Drivers Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers s gt Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers s Installing the MP Drivers Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Page 655 of 678 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the MP Drivers gt Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers The MP Drivers include a printer driver and scanner driver ScanGear By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers unresolved problems may be solved Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model P important You can download the MP Drivers for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before installing the latest MP Drivers delete the previously installed version For information on how to delete the MP Drivers refer to Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Related Topics Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Page 656 of 678 pages ndvanced Guide Advance
416. ocuments at one time P important Pi The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly In that case click ES Thumbnail on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan Photos that have a whitish border Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly Documents smaller than 1 18 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes 1 Place the document on the Platen then start ScanGear scanner driver Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver P important Place the document face down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen 2 Click Advanced Mode The Advanced Mode tab appears _ UD eases owg e a Toon obme Ol preferences __ gece Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Advanced Mode Settings are not retained when you switch between modes 3 Set Color Mode s gt Input Settings 4 Click Preview Preview image appears in the Preview area Note f you scan without preview the show through reduction function will be active This function is useful when scanning magazines However when scanning photos the color tone of the scanned image may differ from the source due to the show thro
417. ode auto Scan Mode Note Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source Set Destination Set Output Size Output size options vary by the items selected in Select Source and Destination Adjust the scan area cropping frame as required Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame scan area on the preview image gt Adjusting Cropping Frames Set Image corrections as required Click Scan Scanning starts E Note Click rT Information to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings document type etc ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box s gt Scan Tab Related Topic Basic Mode Tab Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 459 of 678 pages Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 460 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode In Advanced Mode you can specify the color mode output resolution image brightness color tone etc when scanning This section explains how to scan a single document See Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver to scan multiple d
418. oes Not Work After Upgrading Windows Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Does Not Work Page 620 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scanner Does Not Work Scanner Does Not Work Check 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a hub remove it from the hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer Check 4 Restart the computer Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Page 621 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Check 1 Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed If it is not installed insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers Check 2 On the File menu of the application select Select Source and select the machine P important Do not select the model name that includes WIA in it EA Note The operation may differ depending on the application Check 3 Start from a TWAIN compliant application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Page 6
419. og box opens and you can specify the scan save settings s gt Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen e PDF Scan documents and save them as PDF files When you click this icon the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and application settings PDF Dialog Box e Mail Scan documents or photos and attach them to e mail When you click this icon the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and e mail software program settings Mail Dialog Box e OCR Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad included with Windows When you click this icon the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save settings OCR Dialog Box E8 Note For further procedures refer to the application s manual e Custom Scan documents and open them in a specified application Document type is automatically detected When you click this icon the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and application settings gt Custom Dialog Box E8 Note For further procedures refer to the application s manual e gt E Switch Mode Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals One click Mode Screen Page 414 of 678 pages Switches to Navigation Mode The Navigation Mode screen appears s gt Custom Scan with One click Tab T Preferences Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced setti
420. om ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Page 12 of 678 pages Basic Guide Py Contents gt Copying Copying You can make enlarged or reduced copies of the original to fit the page size and borderless copies of a printed photo besides standard copies Copying Documents Switching the Page Size between A4 and 8 5 x 11 Letter Copying Photos Fit to Page Copying A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Documents Page 13 of 678 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Copying gt Copying Documents Copying Documents This section describes the procedure to copy a document of A4 or Letter size on plain paper For the operation see the notes and operation procedure described in the reference page You need to prepare Originals to copy See Originals You Can Load Paper for printing See Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare for copying 1 Turn on the power See Operation Panel 2 Load paper See Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Here we load A4 or Letter sized plain paper 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying Documents 4 Load an original on the Platen Glass See Loading Originals Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO COPY FACING DOWN and align it with the alignment mark Y as shown below Then close the Document Cover gently E8 Note For details on the types an
421. om ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Documents to My Manual Page 100 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Registering Documents to My Manual Registering Documents to My Manual Register frequently read documents as My Manual documents so that you can refer to those documents easily at any time Canon WH series On screen Man Troubleshooting 1 Display the document Display the document to be added to My Manual 2 Click My Manual The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual ES Note Click to close or display the My Manual pane 3 Register the document to My Manual Click Add The title of the currently displayed document is added to List of My Manual E8 Note a You can also add documents to My Manual by the following methods If you add a document to My Manual a yy mark is displayed in the document icons in the contents pane From the Recently Displayed Documents list double click the document title that you want to add to My Manual or select the document and press Enter key to display the title and then click Add Right click the document title displayed in the contents pane or right click the explanation window and then select Add to My Manual from the right click menu Inthe contents pane select the document title that you want to add to My Manual and then click Add to My Manual at the
422. omatic head alignment and manual head alignment To perform automatic head alignment refer to Aligning the Print Head in the manual Basic Guide and then execute the function from the operation panel of the machine The procedure for performing manual print head alignment is as follows 1 2 sd Print Head Alignment Open the printer driver setup window Click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens Switch head alignment to manual Check the Align heads manually check box Transmit the settings Click Send and click OK when the confirmation message appears Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens Load paper in the machine Load three sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray Execute head alignment Make sure that the machine is on and click Align Print Head Follow the instruction in the message Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Position es When you have entered all the necessary values click OK EA Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that prod
423. on on Canon products How to Use This Screen Pointto a button on the screen to display the description of each function To use a function click the corresponding button Click the butions on the title bar to change the screen size V Start Solution Menu when Windows starts P Important a The number and types of buttons displayed in the window may vary depending on your printer and region Starting Solution Menu a Click Here Solution Menu AS To start from desktop see below Double click the Canon Solution Menu icon on the desktop Alternatively from the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Solution Menu gt Solution Menu From the next time Solution Menu starts when Windows starts If the Start Solution Menu when Windows starts checkbox at the bottom left of the window is not selected Solution Menu does not start when Windows starts ES Note Solution Menu will start automatically when you install it using the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer Changing the Window Size Click m window size large or window size small on the title bar to change the window size Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals About Solution Menu Page 678 of 678 pages large or small Solution Menu opens with the last used window size next time it is started e When screen size is small lt Canon Solution Menu OF amp 3 SSeS ageweeagv Starting an Application 1 Point to a
424. on the Main tab When you execute print the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with ICC Profiles Page 269 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Printing with ICC Profiles Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has a specified input ICC profile you can print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the data effectively The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data When you print the editing and touch up results of Adobe Photoshop Canon Digital Photo Professional or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles you print by effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data To use this printing method use your application software to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC prof
425. on xs Paget Saree 1 Fhoto Noize Reduction Photo Paper Pio Photo Paper Phut Pisiam Semgiort Ghosry Photo Paper Mots Photo Poper P important This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Note When the noise is severe change Normal to Strong The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 184 of 678 pages Adans tiffs Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Cropping Photos Photo Print Eor EX Cropping Photos Photo Print Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions Click j Crop Image in the Layout Print screen or double click the preview image F The Rule of Thad Move the white frame to the portion to print and click OK ES Note To move the cropping area place the cursor within the white frame and drag it Drag the white lines to enlarge reduce the cropping area Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines To create a balanced composition drag any of the intersecting points white squares or white broken lines over the main subject of the photo Downloade
426. ontrast and moving it to the left decreases the contrast You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Contrast Page 280 of 678 pages 0 B amp low High 0 E i Low High 0 a Q Low High ABCDEF aP 1234567 owes Nomai z Sample Type Standard a View Color Patterns 0K cancel Heo P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image is printed with the adjusted contrast Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Simulating an Illustration Page 281 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Simulating an Illustration Simulating an Illustration With the Simulate Illustration function you can print full color or 256 color image data so that it looks like a hand drawn illustration This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is
427. opping frame size by entering the values into a Width and oO Height Click C Keep Aspect Ratio and change it to lal Locked to maintain the aspect ratio when you specify the cropping frame size P important Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible If you select a size other than Flexible a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output Resolution is displayed and its aspect ratio is fixed Note The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size The minimum size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi scaled at 100 When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view the aspect ratio will not be maintained since the size will be prioritized See Adjusting Cropping Frames for details on cropping frames Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Output Settings Page 502 of 678 pages Advanced Cites Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Output Settings ScanGear Output Settings Favorite Settings Ler defined PPP EGE 8 ewag eee a a eer seam L Preferences ese j Output Settings allows you to set the following items e Output Resolution Select the resolution to scan at The higher the resolution value the more detail in your image Select a resolution fro
428. or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the nozzle check pattern 1 Press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until A appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The nozzle check pattern will be printed 5 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 90 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 60 of 678 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern m Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern and clean the Print Head if necessary 1 Check if there are missing lines in the pattern 1 or horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 lel 1 ic i l I 2 liel EA 1 Check if lines are missing in this pattern If yes the cleaning is required See Cleaning the Print Head A Good B Bad lines are missing 2 Check if horizontal white streaks are present in this pattern If yes the cleaning is required See Cleaning the Print Head A B A Good B Bad horizontal white streaks are present O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Head Page 61 of 678 pages be Guide E a Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Prin
429. or adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set fi Canca Th ask Senp Man E3 Page Setup af Efect AH Martenance Meds Tipe Plan Poper Ei Paper Source Rese Tray The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Specify the brightness Select Light Normal or Dark for Brightness and click OK Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness Page 276 of 678 pages ABCDEF 1234567 bots Nomai Sample Type Sandard Feeraty 0 View Cole Patter doi 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed at the specified brightness Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance s gt Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Intensity Page 277 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Intensity You can dilute brighten or intensify darken the colors of the overall image data during printing When you want to sharpen the print results you should intensify the colors The following sample shows the case when the inte
430. or code is displayed take the appropriate action to resolve the error and then reopen it For details on how to resolve the error see An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED e Check 3 Has the Scanning Unit Cover been left open for 10 minutes or longer If the Scanning Unit Cover is left open for more than 10 minutes the FINE Cartridge Holder moves to the right to prevent the Print Head from drying out Close and reopen the Scanning Unit Cover to return the FINE Cartridge Holder to the left e Check 4 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period Close the Scanning Unit Cover wait a while then reopen it If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time the FINE cartridge Holder may not move to the center since the Print Head may overheat EA Note Opening the Scanning Unit Cover while printing moves the FINE Cartridge Holder to the right Close the Scanning Unit Cover and reopen it after printing is complete Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 605 of 678 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Make sure of the following when you load paper e When loading two or more sheets of paper flip through the paper before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the p
431. or details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 156 of 678 pages Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Red Eye Correction 5 Click OK Red eyes are corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image P important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Red Eye Correction a4 fat Redtye Comection 2c Face Boghteret oS Dipta Face Smoothing 99 Blemah Remover Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red Eye Correction Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Paintbrush 5 Drag to select the red area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Downloade
432. ore printing whether there will be no border Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Borderless Printing Page 230 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Fit to Page Printing Page 231 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Fit to Page Printing Fit to Page Printing Festival The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set fit to page printing Select Fit to Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Canen MP270 series Printer Printing Preferences x FB ack Seno lt Man 3B Page Setup of Eocts AJ Martenance E Page Sze Lotier 85x11 l amp Orientation A Pora A ungego Rete 180 degrees 2B Pree Posce Later 35x01 So 8 Nomalsize Bordetess Scaled Page Layout Staple Sde Longas stapling Lett Spectr Marge 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the Printer Paper Si
433. orted Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Matching Page 529 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Appendix Useful Information on Scanning gt Color Matching Color Matching Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor or a printed image with the colors of the original document Example When sRGB is selected as the output profile target Input Profile Source ScanGear Scanner Driver 4 Output Profile Target OS Application Application Printer Driver ScanGear scanner driver converts the image s color space from the scanner s color space to sRGB When displaying on a monitor the image s color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor s color space based on the operating system s monitor settings and the application s working space settings When printing the image s color space is converted from sRGB to the printer s color space based on the application s print settings and the printer driver s settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Other Scanning Methods Page 530 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Other Scanning Methods Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver s gt Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals
434. ortion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper monitor size You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge reduce or move it while maintaining the aspect ratio e Add Delete Opens the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box in which you can specify custom output sizes Add Delete the Output Size E Destination Output Sire List Pent zj Outen Sire Name New Setting width 400 Heght 6 00 Unt ndes Las In the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected along with the predefined items Add To add a size select Print or Image display for Destination then enter Output Size Name Width and Height then click Add The name of the added size appears in Output Size List Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List Delete To delete an item select it in Output Size List and click Delete Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List P important You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels Note Save up to 10 items for each destination An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range Enter a value within the range displayed in the message Unit varies by Destination For Print select mm or inches For Image display the unit is pixels Note See
435. os Sconmed eperted Imager ere ye Recent Sevedinogee I O ipia gt 2 Q Ose F 3 QD Categories O Potrat Q thn y Print 7 D CE sons i cumar lagen 0 D BarenCys insy0 P EdiyConvent on selections E Corpetst to teat He Jumo to Man Meru C Uert Urerhlame Dictares M Mavigatoe EX2009 01 22 001 jeg The Correct Enhance Images window opens EA Note The Correct Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking P Image Correction Enhancement on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box In that case only the target image outlined in orange can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 3 Select the image you want to correct enhance from the thumbnail list The selected image appears in Preview Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Edt Custom Categones Correcting Enhancing Images Manually Page 343 of 678 pages j Fato Photo Fx 92 Face Shapener 29 Datel Face Smootwg Eat _ C Urers Uvertiarne Pictured MP Navigator EONO At 01 003 jpg E8 Note f you selected only one image in the View amp Use window the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears 4 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 5 Click Face Brightener Face Sharpener Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish Remover Wek ont Sore Speciy the anes you wart to conect OS r
436. oster Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set poster printing Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver ah Canan MD O Canon MP270 E ack Setup E Main 3 Page Setup of Brocts Af Martenance ee TE m e T e e El Page Sze Letter 85x11 Orientation a Porat A ungego n Rotate 130 degoes BD Pitar Pocer Sze Later 8511 Page Layout Poster D 5 3 a Bordedess Fttofage Scaled Page Layout 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list Setting 2 by 2 page poster printing is complete Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Poster Printing Page 239 of 678 pages 4 Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box and then click OK Poster Printing E227 mage Dyisors Dried rto 42x 2 X A J Pret Cis Paste innog J Port Cit Paste ines in margins Print page range os Pages Erter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3512 0K cen otas te Image Divisions Select the number of divisions vertical x horizontal As the number of divisions increases the number of sheets u
437. ote You can complete from scanning to saving etc at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the One click Mode screen Stitch Assist is available from the One click Mode screen as well by changing the document size Click the corresponding icon and select Stitch Assist for Document Size Then skip ahead to Step 5 2 Point to Scan Import and click Photos Documents Platen View amp Use Scan Import Documents or Images gt Photos Documents Platen S s E Show fiz window at than tT Preterences Ji 3 Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist cn MP Ni tran e OO Pm F AAU P Ge o a o Place Documests aa S SN Open the document cover and place the photo or Document Type Acuma onthe ten ka Color Photo Document Sae Qe Setact Docesent Type Jado Detect Muticle Documerts pa the hype of photovdecument bom Document Reschstion Xdi __Soecty _ Click Scan O Une he soare diver Jumo to Man Meru 4 Click Specify Select Stitch Assist for Document Size then specify the scanning resolution as required When setting is completed click OK Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents gt Speoty advanced settings for scanning photos and documents Dgscrren Reduce Showstr
438. oto Dialog Box Send via E mail Dialog Box Correct Enhance Images Window One click Mode Screen Auto Scan Dialog Box Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Dialog Box Exif Settings Dialog Box PDF Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box Mail Dialog Box OCR Dialog Box Custom Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box General Tab Scanner Button Settings Tab Save Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Opening Images Saved on a Computer Scanning with Other Application Software What Is ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting Histogram Adjusting Tone Curve Setting Threshold ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens Basic Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons Auto Scan Mode Tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP270 series MP250 series Advanced Guide Page 88 of 678 pages Preferences Dialog Box Scanner Tab Preview Tab
439. otoPrint EX You can use Easy PhotoPrint EX to print scanned photos at high quality or to layout and print images 1 Select images and click Print 2 Click Print Photo or Print Album on the list Easy PhotoPrint EX starts See Printing Photos for details E8 Note a f Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed print with MP Navigator EX When Printing Photos Using MP Navigator EX 1 Select images and click Print 2 Click Print Photo on the list Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photos Page 365 of 678 pages 3 Specify print settings as required In the displayed dialog box specify paper size print count etc gt Print Photo Dialog Box Photo g Printer _ Properties Paper Sie Letter 85x11 z Meda Type Fian Pacer X Page Layout Fato Page Parting X F Bordedess Parting fa Potrat la 2 4 Click Print Printing starts EA Note To cancel while spooling click Cancel To cancel while printing click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status To open a confirmation window for the printer status click printer icon on the taskbar Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Sending via E mail Page 366 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Sending via E mail MP Navigator EX Sending via E ma
440. ou are specifying multiple copy together Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 225 of 678 pages Uncheck this check box to print all pages with the same page number together 5 Complete the setup Click OK The specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order P important When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function give priority to the printer driver settings However if the print results are not acceptable specify the function settings on the application software When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected for Page Layout Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page Layout Note By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate you can perform printing so that papers are collated one by one starting from the last page These settings can be used in combination with Borderless Normal size Fit to Page Scaled Page Layout and Duplex Printing Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting the Stapling Margin Page 226 of 678 pages AdvancedGui
441. ou can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows 1 2 Turn off the machine P important When you turn on the computer while the machine is on the Windows Plug and Play function is executed automatically and the Found New Hardware window Windows Vista or Found New Hardware Wizard window Windows XP Windows 2000 is displayed In this case click Cancel Start the installer Double click the icon of the downloaded file The installation program starts P important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning Install the driver At the Welcome window click Next Read the contents of the License Agreement window After checking the contents click Yes Installation of the MP Drivers begins After the Installation Complete window is displayed check that the machine and the computer are connected through a cable To select the connection port for your machine manually check t
442. oubleshooting gt An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Alarm Lamp Is Lit Orange When a machine error occurs the Alarm lamp is lit orange and E and number error code are alternately displayed on the LED Check the error code displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action to correct the error Depending on the error occurred the Alarm lamp is not lit Error Code E 0 2 The machine is out of paper Paper does not feed E 0 3 Paper Output Tray is closed Paper jam E 0 4 The FINE Cartridge cannot E015 be recognized E 0 7 FINE Cartridge is not installed in the correct position E 0 8 Ink absorber is almost full E 0 9 The machine has not MP270 series received a response from only the digital camera The digital camera or digital video camcorder connected is not compatible with this machine Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reload the paper on the Rear Tray correctly and press the Black or Color button If the Paper Output Tray is closed open it The machine resumes printing If opening the Paper Output Tray does not resolve the problem or if the tray was open to begin with the paper may be jammed Remove the jammed paper reload paper properly in the printer then press the Black or Color button Paper Jams The FINE Cartridge may not be installed properly or the Cartridge may not be compatible with this machine Open
443. ough F Ureharp Mak Remove gutter shadow Corect slanted document C Detect the onertation of text documents and state rages Eragkahs a oer 5 Click Scan Geman E _Febowtheprocedie below to ean photos ot caret 99 Prteowees SA oF Bs AN a a E tone a m Phetos Documents Piaion Place Documosts Open the document cover and place the photo or Document Type Hameri on the platen x Coe Preto 2 Select Docesent Typo are Diep diano Reschdion Odo Speci Click Scan D Use te sorre diver Jumo to Man Meru Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 332 of 678 pages Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Page 333 of 678 pages The Stitch assist window opens 6 Place the left half of the document face down on the Platen 7 Click Scan The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch assist window FCP PT 1S 14 ELI ET 8 Place the right half of the document face down on the Platen 9 Click Scan The right half of the document is scanned 10 Adjust the scanned image as required Use the icons to swap the left and right halves rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge reduce the image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Page 334 of 678 pages P Sachant 34 O iny potion fer mage anem poa wari ba cor raa Chek Hest
444. ow to load printing paper in the Rear Tray and how to load originals to copy or scan Loading Paper Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Loading Envelopes Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Loading Originals Loading Originals Originals You Can Load A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Loading Paper Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Loading Envelopes Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use m Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper gt Important If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 X 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm or 2 16 x 3 58 55 0 x 91 0 mm Card size to perform trial print it can cause paper jams E8 Note We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos For details on the Canon genuine paper see Media Types You Can Use You can use general copy paper For the page size and paper weight you can use for this machine see Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare paper Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it E gt Note Align the edges of paper neatly before loading Loading paper without aligning the edges may cause paper jams f paper is curled hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat For detail
445. ownloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Page 641 of 678 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter please contact the seller of the machine or the service center Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers Caution If the machine emits any unusual sound smoke or odor turn it off immediately Unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine yourself Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of whether the warranty has expired Before contacting the service center confirm the following e Product name Your machine s name is located on the front cover of the setup manual e Serial number please refer to the setup manual e Details of the problem e What you tried to solve the problem and what happened Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals FAQs Page 642 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt FAQs FAQs No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Cannot Install the MP Drivers gt Printi
446. ows if the print result is upside down open the printer driver setup window select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings then select the Rotate 180 degrees check box in Additional Features For details on the printer driver settings see Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Can Use CEDIA Gilets Page 49 of 678 pages Contents gt Loading Paper Originals gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Can Use m Media Types You Can Use Choose paper suitable for printing for the best print results Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of printing such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos Media Types Commercially available papers Plain Paper Recycled paper 943 Approx 100 sheets Canon genuine papers Approx 50 sheets Envelopes 10 envelopes 4 Envelope Plain Paper For printing photos Photo Paper Pro A4 Letter 5 x 7 13x 18 cm Platinum and 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 10 lt PT 101 gt 5 sheets 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 20 sheets Photo Paper Pro II lt PR 201 gt 5 Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use lt GP 501 gt 3 5 Photo Paper Glossy lt GP 502 gt 3 5 Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il lt PP 201 gt 3 5 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss
447. ox and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 7 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Changing and Registering Some Background Settings 1 Select the background for which the settings are to be changed Check the Background check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the background you want to change from the Background list 2 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens 3 Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window 4 Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab When you want to save the background with a different title enter a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 253 of 678 pages 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1 Click Select Background in the Stamp Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the background to be deleted Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab and then click Delete Click OK when the confirmatio
448. per Size and Orientation Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Background Page 199 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Background Easy PhotoPrint EX amp Changing Background You can change the background of each page P important a You cannot change the background of the Photo Print Stickers and Layout Print Click Background in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen then click al Change Background E9 Note a The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create 3 5 Single calor Image file No background A aoa Jaaa aae J Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box When Select from samples is Selected Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK ES Note Select from samples will be displayed only if Aloum has been selected Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in the application Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Changing Background Click Search backgrounds to access t
449. photos Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box A To display the Preferences dialog box click Tf Settings or select Preferences from the File menu a See Help for details on the Layout Print screen Downl Q Page top oaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating an Album Page 116 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Changing Layout s gt Changing Background s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating an Album Page 11
450. pliant with PictBridge before connecting the device You may also have to turn on the device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the machine Perform necessary operations on the PictBridge compliant device before connecting it to this machine according to instructions given in the device s instruction manual 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load paper on the Rear Tray 3 Make sure that the PictBridge compliant device is turned off 4 Connect the PictBridge compliant device to the machine using a USB cable A recommended by the device s manufacturer The PictBridge compliant device turns on automatically If your device does not turn on automatically turn it on manually When machine is correctly connected to the device c will appear on the LED and the message that the machine is connected will be displayed on the LCD of the device Refer to the device s instruction manual Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device MP270 series only Page 539 of 678 pages 5 Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge compliant device Select the size and type of paper that you loaded in the machine s gt Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device 6 Start printing from your PictBridge compliant device P important Never disconnect the USB cable during print
451. print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures P important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser EX the folder tree area will not be displayed The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails 3 Select the image s you want to print and click one of the buttons below To print on the front cover click w Import to Front Cover To print on the inside pages click ke Import to Inside Pages To print on the back cover click Import to Back Cover The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area EA Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click E Delete Imported Image Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Selecting a Photo Page 122 of 678 pages To delete all images from the selected image area click i Delete All Imported Images EA Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 123 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Editing rl Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede aber
452. print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 150 of 678 pages EE Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 151 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images Click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print You can make the following correctio
453. printing again Close the Scanning Unit Cover on the machine The FINE Cartridge is not installed or the Cartridge may not be compatible with this machine See E 0 4 E 0 5 in An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action The ink absorber is nearly full See E 0 9 in An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED and take the appropriate action e The FINE Cartridge has or may have run out of ink e The FINE Cartridge may not be installed properly or may not be compatible with this machine Check the error code on the LED and take the appropriate action to resolve the error s gt An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED FINE Cartridge errors have occurred Replace the FINE Cartridge Routine Maintenance Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Problems with Scanning Page 619 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning Problems with Scanning Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear s gt Scan Quality Image Displayed on the Monitor Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas s Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode s gt Slow Scanning Speed gt There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed gt Computer Stops Operating during Scanning s gt Scanner D
454. printing faster 6 Select Start printing after last page is spooled 7 After printing return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately To cancel while spooling click Cancel To cancel while printing click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status To open a confirmation window for the printer status click printer icon on the taskbar Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page top Page 363 of 678 pages Printing Photos Page 364 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Printing Photos Printing Photos You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine After scanning documents and saving them open the View amp Use window to select how you want to print the photos ET Prtences 2 B BP Dn ja Gam aon Gore At Specie Categones Edt Cuctors Cotegones v Photo waa Selected 3 v Pora insya Gekctet 2 ba i v Douee mogt b BuresnCad insga H Selections Send EdivConven Jumo to Man Meru i S le CAlvers Uverhlame Pictures Navigate EX 2000_01 ANO jeg Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer gt Opening Images Saved on a Computer When Printing Photos Using Easy Ph
455. printing photographs or other graphics enabling color correction in the printer driver may improve color Windows Select Vivid Photo in the Effects sheet in the printer properties dialog box acintosh Select Color Options in the pop up menu in the Print dialog box and then select Vivid Photo on the Color Mode In Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 select Special Effects in the Print dialog box and then select Vivid Photo e Check 2 Is the FINE Cartridge installed properly If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed securely ink may not be ejected correctly Open the Scanning Unit Cover open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover then close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover When you close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover push the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks into place e Check 3 When a FINE Cartridge runs out of ink replace it with a new one e Check 4 Is the Nozzle Check Pattern printed properly Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning
456. r Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Manual for Color Intensity and then click Set 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity tom 1 Open the Print dialog box s gt Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh 2 Select Color Options in the pop up menu 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar to set the intensity Check 6 Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper the lower edge of the paper may become stained with ink Resize your original document in your application software s gt Printing Area Check 7 Is the Platen Glass dirty Clean the Platen Glass gt Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Check 8 Is inside of the machine dirty When performing duplex printing the inside of the machine may become stained with ink causing the printout to become smudged Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine Routine Maintenance ES Note 1 To prevent the inside of the machine from stains set the paper size correctly Check 9 Set Ink Drying Wait Time longer Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented Windows 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Open the pri
457. r B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed s gt Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed gt Mie writing Error Output Error Communication Error gt Error Number 300 Is Displayed mp MEST Error Number 1700 Is Displayed gt Ink Info Number 1688 Is Displayed gt MD nk Info Number 1686 Is Displayed sp MEE Error Number 2001 Is Displayed MP270 series only sp MEE Error Number 2002 Is Displayed MP270 series only MAMA Other Error Messages b it the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed Mmm the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Contact the service center Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed is displayed in the alphanumeric character and depends on the error occurred e 5100 Is Displayed Confirm the moveme
458. r if you set the destination to a network folder Be sure to specify a local folder e Application to run Displays the applications that can be started via MP Navigator EX Install the applications from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the machine For Attach to E mail you can select an e mail software program to start For Open PDF file the application associated with the pdf file extension by the operating system is displayed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals General Tab Page 445 of 678 pages P important You can change which items are installed during installation from the Setup CD ROM by selecting Custom Install If you choose not to install some applications with Custom Install the corresponding MP Navigator EX functions will be unavailable To use those functions install the corresponding applications Note For Convert to text file Notepad included with Windows is displayed Click Set to open a dialog box then specify Document Language and how to scan multiple documents Test Conversion Settings Ea z Document Language Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned Only text written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to Notepad Combine multiple text conversion results When scanning multiple documents select the checkbox to collect the conversion results text into one file This checkbox is selected by default
459. r ink cartridge is detached Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Managing the Machine Power Page 565 of 678 pages Adna tiffs Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Managing the Machine Power Managing the Machine Power This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows unl Power Off The Power Off function turns off the machine When you use this function you will not be able to turn the machine on from the printer driver 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab When the confirmation message appears click OK The machine power switches off and the Maintenance tab is displayed again Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Reducing the Machine Noise Page 566 of 678 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Changing the Machine Settings gt Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer gt Reducing the Machine Noise Reducing the Machine Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise of the machine Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night etc Using this function may lower the print speed The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows z Quiet Mode 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Cli
460. r size in MP Navigator EX See Scanning Photos and Documents to scan images using MP Navigator EX Documents other than photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and CD DVD A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD DVD labels may not be scanned properly documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise Scanner Button Settings Tab Save Page 447 of 678 pages Actions Scan Settings e Document Size This setting is automatically set e Resolution This setting is automatically set e Specify Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The File Name Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed P important If you select this function you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files e File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved up to 64 charact
461. rds business cards magazines newspapers text documents and CD DVD A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 mm such as paperback pages with the spine cut off Documents printed on thin white paper Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD DVD labels may not be scanned properly Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned Otherwise documents may not be scanned correctly See Placing Documents for details on how to place documents EA Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save Dialog Box One click Mode Screen Page 419 of 678 pages To reduce moire set Document Type to Magazine e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Custom Size Setting Wie 850 inches 1 008 50 11 09 inches 1 00 11 69 z P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Use the scanner driver
462. re Applications Page 39 of 678 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Other Usages gt Useful Software Applications Useful Software Applications The machine can be used with useful software applications such as Solution Menu My Printer and Easy WebPrint EX m Solution Menu With Solution Menu you can start the software applications supplied with the machine or display the operating instructions tira Double click Solution Menu on the desktop Click Here Solution Menu acintosh Click S Solution Menu in the Dock The screens below are for Windows Vista Cpe Soh tn Phony 5 x Mai Da to e 6 oe le Click the button of a function to use gt After starting Solution Menu click the button on the title bar to reduce the window size Canon Solution Menu olf CE E E E A ES Note Install Solution Menu from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Solution Menu select Solution Menu in Custom Install The buttons displayed on the screen may vary depending on the country or region of purchase To start Solution Menu from the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Canon Utilities Solution Menu then Solution Menu acintosh To start Solution Menu from the menu bar select the Go menu Applications Canon Utilities Solution Menu then double click Solution Menu m My Printer With My Printer you can display the printer driver set
463. re frames are displayed Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view 26 EE Select All Frames This button is available when two or more frames are displayed Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue e Select All Cropping Frames This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines The settings will be applied to all the cropping frames o bend Remove Cropping Frame Removes the selected cropping frame PT Information Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 497 of 678 pages Advanced Mode Tab Page 498 of 678 pages Displays the version of ScanGear scanner driver and the current scan settings document type etc e Open Guide This page appears Preview Area e Preview Area This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview You can also check the results of the settings image corrections color adjustments etc made in Settings and Operation Buttons When Aza Thumbnail is displayed on the Toolbar Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned EA Note When multiple images are previewed different outlines indicate different selection status Focus Frame thick blue outline The displayed settings will be applied Selected Frame thin blue outline The s
464. recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Below is an example of an image in which the Cyan amp Red pair has been adjusted Color Balance Cyan Reg Cyan is increased Red is increased A b p Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 477 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Brightness and Contrast ScanGear Adjusting Brightness and Contrast In ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab click Brightness Contrast ES Note Click Down arrow to switch to detailed view Click Up arrow to return to the previous view Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red Green and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel e Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined e Red Adjust the Red channel e Green Adjust the Green channel e Blue Adjust the Blue channel Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 478 of 678 pages EE Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color
465. repeatedly until r appears on the LED then press the Black button to enable the Prevent paper abrasion function To disable the Prevent paper abrasion function press the Maintenance button repeatedly until r appears on the LED then press the Color button e To set by using the printer driver Windows Open the printer properties dialog box and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet select the Prevent paper abrasion check box and then click Send To open the printer properties dialog box see Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows to In the Canon IJ Printer Utility select Custom Settings in the pop up menu select the Prevent paper abrasion check box and then click Send To open the Canon IJ Printer Utility see Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh e Check 5 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion Reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 593 of 678 pages Windows 1 Open the printer properties dialog box sb Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows ve Click Here for MP270 series Printer Driver ve Click Here for MP250 series Printer Drive
466. responding icon s gt One click Mode Screen e Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears fT Preferences Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box fae Opens this guide Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View _Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 379 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab MP Navigator EX View amp Use Images on your Computer Tab Point to View amp Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View amp Use Images on your Computer tab You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e mail You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine w amp Use Images on your Computer My Box Gi Scanned Imported Images Y Specity Folder lt s gt Recently Saved Images eno E Show bit window af tan At Proterences 2 e My Box Scanned Imported Images Opens the View amp Use window with My Box Scanned Imported Images selected You can open and use images saved in My Box My Box is a specific folder for
467. rinting This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data It also allows you to print date time and user name The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data The procedure for performing stamp background printing is as follows Printing a Stamp CONFIDENTIAL IMPORTANT and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre registered 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab EH ask Senp E Man B Page Setup u Efocts ff Martenance El Page Sze tesa a Orertation a O Porat A ungego Rotate 130 degrees a f Sane ds Page Sre hd Page Layout Nomalsize Pian Paper 2 2 mmn noe Sone Bet ee Dere Samp Background fink page only 0K creat tna tee 3 Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box and select a desired stamp from the list Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Stamp Background Printing Page 246 of 678 pages The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the stamp details If necessary specify the following settings and then click OK Place stamp over text To print the stamp on the front of the document check this check box Note The
468. rofiles or does allow you to specify one by specifying input ICC profiles from printer profiles of the printer driver When printing Adobe RGB data you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with ICC Profiles FR aksep Man E Page Setup af tects ff Martenance Meds Type Plan Paper Paper Source Rew Try Port Qualty High Sanded Bon Custom Pian Paper Color ntensty Leger 8 5 11 215 2279 dene S Ago FI Preview before parting 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select ICM for Color Correction 6 Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data e For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile Select Standard e For Adobe RGB data Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 271 of 678 pages Printing with ICC Profiles Page 272 of 678 pages Select Adobe RGB 1998 P impor
469. rong White Streaks Page 585 of 678 pages e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2 Is the FINE Cartridge installed properly If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed securely ink may not be ejected correctly Open the Scanning Unit Cover open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover then close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover When you close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover push the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover until it clicks into place e Check 3 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly After performing the Print Head Cleaning print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Ink may have run out Replace the FINE Cartridge e Check 4 When a FINE Car
470. ropping frame to enlarge reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio e Monitor Size 1024 x 768 pixels etc Select an output size in pixels Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 489 of 678 pages A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed and the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio e Add Delete Opens the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box in which you can specify custom output sizes You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display Add Delete the Output Size Outpt Sre Name Output Sine Ust New Setting width 400 Hegt 6 00 In the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected along with the predefined items Add To add a size enter Output Size Name Width and Height then click Add For Unit you can select mm or inches when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image display The name of the added size appears in Output Size List Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List Delete To delete an item select it in Output Size List and click Delete Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List P important You cannot delete predefi
471. rrection operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 160 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Sharpener Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears J Auto Photo Fix a RedEye Conection 22 Face Shapenet of Digtal Face Smoothing En C Users User Namegirlandlower jpg E8 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on t
472. rt Holds the Scanning Unit Cover while it is open 15 FINE Cartridge Holder Install the FINE Cartridges The Color FINE Cartridge should be installed into the left slot and the Black FINE Cartridge should be installed into the right slot 16 FINE Cartridges Ink Cartridges A replaceable cartridge that is integrated with Print Head and ink tank E8 Note For details on installing the FINE Cartridges refer to the printed manual Getting Started gt Important The area A indicated in the figure below may be splattered with ink It does not affect the performance of the machine Do not touch the area A The machine may not print properly if you touch it m Operation Panel MP270 series MP250 series Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 6 of 678 pages Main Components Page 7 of 678 pages 1 9 8 1 ON button Power lamp Turns the power on or off Before turning on the power make sure that the Document Cover is closed gt Important Disconnecting the power plug When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power be sure to confirm that the Power lamp is not lit If the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet while the Power lamp is lit or flashing the machine may become unable to print properly since the Print Head is not protected ES Note Power and Alarm lamps You can check the status of the machine with the Power lamp and Al
473. s 2 Press the Black button to select A4 or the Color button to select Letter ES Note You can switch the size of paper selected when the machine is turned on between A4 and Letter Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Page 305 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine gt Copying gt Using Useful Copy Functions gt Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Copying without Borders Borderless Copy You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders 1 Load photo paper on the Rear Tray 2 Press the Paper button to select the page size you loaded on the Rear Tray E9 Note You can switch the size of paper loaded on the Rear Tray between A4 and Letter Switching the Page Size between A4 and Letter When A4 or 8 5 x11 Plain Paper is selected borderless copying is not available 3 Press the Fit to Page button The Fit to Page lamp lights up To cancel borderless copying press the Fit to Page button again EA Note You can use the Fit to Page button only when you are using the copy function Copied images are automatically reduced or enlarged to fit the page size you select for borderless copying 4 Press the button repeatedly to specify the number of copies E8 Note By pressing the button repeatedly F will be displayed on the LED The number of copie
474. s gt Classifying Images into Categories Classifying Images into Categories Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category You can classify unclassified images automatically and also create custom categories You can drag and drop an image to move it from one category to another E8 Note f you have classified the images in MP Navigator EX 2 0 or later and then upgrade MP Navigator EX to the latest version the classification information on the second latest version is transferred upon initial startup After the initial startup the classification information cannot be transferred 1 Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them then open the View amp Use window from the Navigation Mode screen E9 Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2 In Categories 7 Sort by select Categories Images are automatically sorted by category and appear in the Thumbnail window 9 Click to zeleci the image 1T Poetecences tal F B HF Dan a TEN C Choe AI Speetc Categones Edt Cuntom Cotegenes Hy Bos ScamnedAapated Imager wre dy rrr Roconi v Pons maert Gedi Q Prete Q Persi v Otar mar Git Q thn 2 Q Decurnmt Q buinen Cord O Ponteard Q ndri Sze O POF Fite Hp Mme Q Others v Domet maya y ed Q Curtom Categories Q Urctanrited gt Sure Cod bapend Edit Custom Cat
475. s gt Originals You Can Load m Originals You Can Load You can copy or scan the following originals Types of originals Text document magazine or newspaper Printed photo picture card business card or DVD CD Size W x L Max 8 5 x 11 7 inches 216 x 297 mm E8 Note When loading a thick original such as a book on the Platen Glass you can load it by removing the Document Cover from the machine For details on how to remove or attach the Document Cover refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide amp Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Routine Maintenance Page 56 of 678 pages Basic Guide I Contents gt Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance This section describes how to clean the machine when the print result is faint to replace FINE Cartridges when they run out of ink or to take an action when paper does not feed properly When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Replacing a FINE Cartridge Replacing Procedure Checking the Ink Status Cleaning the Machine Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine gt amp Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrec
476. s Page 636 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Page 637 of 678 pages AJEA S Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Check 1 Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen gt Placing Documents Check 2 Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again If the matching size is not found scan at a larger size and trim the image See the Toolbar Trimming in Correct Enhance Images Window for details Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning U Page 638 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt MP Navigator EX Problems gt Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Ch
477. s errors that are indicated on Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices The error messages and operations may vary depending on the device you are using For errors on non Canon PictBridge compliant devices check the error code on the LED and take the appropriate action to clear the error For details see An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED For the errors indicated on the PictBridge compliant device and their solution also refer to the instruction manual of the device For other troubles on the device contact the manufacturer Error Message on the PictBridge Compliant Device Printer in use No paper Paper Error Paper jam Printer cover open No print head Waste tank full Ink absorber full No ink Ink cassette error Hardware Error If the machine is printing from the computer or warming up wait until the job ends When it is ready the machine starts printing automatically Load paper on the Rear Tray and select Continue in the display on your PictBridge compliant device To resume printing you can also press the Black or Color button on the machine instead of selecting Continue on the device The Paper Output Tray is closed Open the Paper Output Tray then press the Black or Color button on the machine Select Stop in the display on your PictBridge compliant device to stop printing Remove the jammed paper load new paper press the Black or Color button on the machine and try
478. s machine is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select a printing profile suited for the purpose When you select a printing profile the Additional Features Media Type and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset Zor Perens ne deml Printing Borderless Parting Duplex Prrting 1 Grayscale Porting Print from Last Page Fas Speed Proety Meds Type Porter Paper Size Plain Paper Letter 5017 Orentation D Potrat Landscape Pret Quality Pacer Source Standard Rese Trey gt Copies 1 01 339 E Aways Bret wth Curert Semings Deas OK Cca oy hp 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose P important When you check the Always Print with Current Settings check box all settings on the Quick Setup Main Page Setup and Effects tabs are saved and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well Click Save to register the specified settings For instructions on registering settings see Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 223
479. s on how to flatten curled paper refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Load paper pap 1 Open the Paper Support raise it then tip it back 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 43 of 678 pages Loading Paper 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the paper in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING YOU gt Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation B Loading paper in the landscape orientation C can cause paper jams IN B C 4 Slide the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the paper stack Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The paper may not be fed properly Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 44 of 678 pages Loading Paper Page 45 of 678 pages ES Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark D E9 Note The machine may make operating noise when feeding paper After loading paper When copying select the size and type of the loaded paper using the Operation Panel on the machine See Copying When printing with a computer select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size or Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver See Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh 90 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter
480. s on the right Drag LJ to specify the scan area 6 Click Scan When scanning is completed the scanned image appears in the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Page 534 of 678 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Other Scanning Methods gt Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver Windows Image Acquisition WIA is a driver model implemented in Windows XP It allows you to scan documents without using an application Scan documents from a TWAIN compliant application to specify advanced settings for scanning 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware gt Scanners and Cameras then double click WIA Canon model name The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box opens 3 Click Next 4 Select Picture type according to the document to be scanned gt Scanner and Camera Wirard x Choare Scanning Pielerences gsh Dooie you searing peeferences and hen R Paavi to pae Now you etlenencer aiat G ri ES Note Toscan with the values previously set in Custom Settings select Custom 5 Click Custom Settings to set the preferences as required Properties Berden OPI 150 e Brightness Move the slider to adjust the bright
481. s will be set as 20 When you want to make 10 to 19 copies specify the number of copies to 20 then load the same number of pieces of paper In this case the machine will stop copying in an error Press the Stop Reset button to release the error Pressing the Stop Reset button returns the number of copies to 1 5 Press the Color button for color copying or the Black button for black amp white copying The machine starts borderless copying P important Do not open the Document Cover or remove the original from the Platen Glass until copying is complete ES Note Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page To cancel copying press the Stop Reset button Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Copying without Borders Borderless Copy Page 306 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Page 307 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning Scanning gt Scanning Images Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine s gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software s gt Scanning with Other Application Software Other Scanning Methods Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Page 308 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning Images Scanning Images gt Scanning Images Before Scanning
482. sPrinter com Manuals Basic Mode Tab Page 488 of 678 pages e Preview Performs a trial scan Gy a BRBBES 7 ES Note When using the machine for the first time scanner calibration starts automatically Wait a while until the preview image appears e Destination Select what you want to do with the scanned image e Print Select this to print the scanned image on a printer e Image display Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor e OCR Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software OCR software is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be edited in word processors and other programs e Output Size Select an output size Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination e Flexible Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames In thumbnail view Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned When no cropping frame is displayed each frame is scanned individually In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed the entire Preview area will be scanned When a cropping frame is displayed the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned e Paper Size L A4 etc Select an output paper size The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper size You can drag the c
483. sable the automatic correction deselect the checkbox Face Brightener Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened You can adjust the effect level using the slider Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider Blemish Remover Removes moles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area Undo Cancels the latest correction enhancement Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Correct Enhance Images Window Page 175 of 678 pages Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Questions and Answers Page 176 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers
484. scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Exif Settings Dialog Box Page 427 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Exif Settings Dialog Box Exif Settings Dialog Box You can input Exif information into a file to be saved Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG Embedding Exif information into scanned images allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images The Exif Settings dialog box can be opened when Save as type is JPEG Exif i5000 l Base hiomaton ton Value Ed veson 2n Maar Cann Model F Steve MP Navagator EX Color Space sRGB maye Wath 1520p iaga Lergh 1056 jpocei XResknon x9
485. screen Note See the following section for details on how to select photos s gt Selecting a Photo This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8 5 x11 and A4 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Photos Page 193 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Saving Photos Saving Photos You can save edited photos The information of cropping and layout can be saved Click Save in the Layout Print screen Select the layat you wart lo part Check the Prenew and cick the Print button Preting starts SSRnRaela When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save Note Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 194 of 678 pages ASAA Gtitel Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Opening Saved Files Easy PhotoPrint EX c Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click
486. sed for printing increases allowing you to create a larger poster Print Cut Paste in margins To leave out words Cut and Paste uncheck this check box P important This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used Print Cut Paste lines in margins To leave out cut lines uncheck this check box Pages To reprint only specific pages enter the page number you want to print To print multiple pages specify by separating the pages with commas or entering a hyphen between the page numbers E9 Note You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be divided into several pages during printing After all poster pages have been printed paste the pages together to create a poster Printing Only Specific Pages If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing you can reprint specific pages by following the procedure below 1 Set the print range In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab click the pages that do not need to be printed The pages that were clicked are deleted and only the pages to be printed are displayed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Poster Printing WR asek Senp S Man B Poze Set of tects if Martenance z E Page Sze Letter 85x117 a Oiertation A Pora A ungcpe Rotae 180 degrees B Prt Poc
487. set to Auto Mode in the Save or Custom dialog box When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data specify Document Type do not select Auto Mode Related Topic Easy Scanning with One click Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Page 383 of 678 pages MP Navigator EX Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Point to Scan Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos Documents Platen to open the Photos Documents Platen screen Scan Import window Open this window to scan documents from the Platen O Use te saner diver Clear 1 Seve at PDF tite Jumo to Man Mens 1 Settings and Operation Buttons 2 Toolbar 3 Thumbnail Window 4 Selected Images Area Settings and Operation Buttons View amp Use Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer The View amp Use window opens s gt View amp Use Window e Photos Documents Platen Displays the screen for scanning photos documents magazines and other printed materials e Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned Scanning photos Color Photo or Black and White Pho
488. sily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create your own calendar using your favorite photos It ll be exciting to turn the calendar pages You can also create 2 month 6 month and 12 month You can use all kinds of photos calendars Create Stickers Create stickers easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends CHECK You can add text to photos Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 674 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using MP Navigator EX Page 675 of 678 pages AJAn Giitels Advanced Guide gt Using MP Navigator EX Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents It is suitable even for beginners Start MP Navigator EX 29 Click Here MP Navigator EX Ea Note See Let s Try Scanning for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX Scan Photos and Documents You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens You can also save print scanned images using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX Scan Small Documents at One Time You can scan multiple small documents photos cards etc at one time It is useful as you do not need to scan multiple times _ a gt 4 a a C e nice Yn Scan Large Documents You can easily scan documents that are larger than t
489. sk Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image e Remove gutter shadow Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Auto Detect Auto Detect Multiple Documents or Stitch Assist Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen Note Use ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set For details see Gutter Shadow Correction in Image Settings ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab e Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle within 0 1 to 10 degrees or 0 1 to 10 degrees of the document P important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected as the text cannot be detected correctly Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Page 424 of 678 pages Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text Documents with extremely large or small fonts Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures images or hand written text Documents containing both vertical and horizo
490. specify detailed print settings on the Main sheet or Page Setup sheet For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 7 Start printing Click Print or OK to start printing Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Windows Page 32 of 678 pages Pope HEE AAN nad a canys fo mance 5 ES Note The message on how to load envelopes will appear when printing on them This message will not appear next time if you select the Do not show this message again check box For details on the settings to print envelopes see Loading Envelopes To cancel a print job in progress press the Stop Reset button on the machine or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor To display the printer status monitor click Canon XXX Printer where XXX is your machine s name on the taskbar If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head 9 0 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Macintosh Basic Guide Page 33 of 678 pages Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Documents Macintosh Printing Documents Macintosh This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide ES Note Operations may vary depending on your software applicatio
491. sta MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Application Settings OCR with Specify an OCR application When MP Navigator EX is specified after the image is scanned the text in the image is extracted and appears in Notepad included with Windows EA Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad included with Windows Click Set on the General tab and specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned When scanning multiple documents you can collect the extracted text into one file General Tab Text displayed in Notepad included with Windows is for guidance only Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points at 300 dpi Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals OCR Dialog Box Page 438 of 678 pages Slanted documents Documents placed upside down or
492. sword 4 Rearrange the page order as required Use the icons to rearrange the order Alternatively drag and drop the thumbnail to the target location Note See Create Edit PDF file Window for details on the Create Edit PDF file window 5 Click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages The Save as PDF file dialog box opens Save as PDF file Dialog Box P important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions If a password protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box Setting Passwords for PDF Files 6 Specify the save settings in the Save as PDF file dialog box then click Save Images are saved according to the settings Opening PDF Files in an Application You can open PDF files created with MP Navigator EX in an associated application and edit or print them 1 Select PDF files and click PDF P important For PDF files you can only select those created with MP Navigator EX You cannot select PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be selected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Editing PDF Files Page 361 of 678 pages as well 2 Click Open PDF file on the list The application associated with the pdf file extension by the operating system starts P important Password protected PDF files cannot be opened in applic
493. t How to Use This Manual gt Trademarks Trademarks e Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation e Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Bonjour is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Adobe Adobe Photoshop Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB 1998 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Exif Print This machine supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the camera s image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing from a Computer Page 104 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer Printing from a Computer Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Page top Downloaded fro
494. t Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern Print the pattern if printing becomes faint or if a specific color fails to print The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows Nozzle Check Open the printer driver setup window Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab The Nozzle Check dialog box opens To display a list of items that you should check before printing the check pattern click Initial Check Items Load paper in the machine Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray Print a nozzle check pattern Make sure that the machine is on and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern is printed Click OK when the confirmation message appears The Pattern Check dialog box opens Check the print result Check the print result When the print result is normal click Exit If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections click Cleaning to clean the print head Related Topic s gt Cleaning the Print Heads Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning Inside the Machine Page 558 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning Inside the Machine
495. t Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods s gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Overview of the Printer Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Various Printing Methods Page 221 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods s gt Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation s gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order s gt Setting the Stapling Margin gt Borderless Printing s gt Fit to Page Printing gt Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing s gt Poster Printing gt Booklet Printing s gt Duplex Printing s gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background s gt Printing an Envelope Displaying the Print Results before Printing gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with Easy Setup Page 222 of 678 pages Anad Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing with Easy Setup Printing with Easy Setup The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on thi
496. t or select Exit to end The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window O Cance MP Navigator EX foe 97 Pretesences 2 Be by Owe a Jumo to Man Mer 7 Edit the scanned images as required Use Edit Tools to rotate images select a part of an image etc See the Edit Tools in Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window for details EA Note First select images to edit Selected images are outlined in orange Drag the mouse or use Shift arrow keys to select multiple images 8 Save the scanned images gt Saving Saving as PDF Files E Note If you want to preview the images before scanning use ScanGear scanner driver s gt Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Page 331 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Let s Try Scanning gt Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Scanning Images Larger than the Platen Stitch Assist Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right halves of a large document separately and combine the scanned images back into one image You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the Platen 1 Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen Starting MP Navigator EX EA N
497. t MP Navigator EX as the starting software application in Image Capture under Applications in Mac OS X 1 Select Applications on the Go menu and double click the Image Capture icon 2 Click Options at lower left of the scanner window select MP Navigator EX 3 in Application to launch when scanner button is pressed then click OK To quit Image Capture select Quit Image Capture on the Image Capture menu ES Note if Options does not appear select Preferences on the Image Capture menu click Scanner and click Use TWAIN software whenever possible to clear the option Then quit Image Capture and restart it m Saving Scanned Data on the Computer 1 Prepare for scanning 1 Turn on the power See Operation Panel 2 Load an original on the Platen Glass See Loading Originals Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Saving Scanned Data on the Computer Page 23 of 678 pages 2 Press the SCAN button to start scanning The original will be scanned and saved on the computer according to the settings specified with MP Navigator EX Remove the original on the Platen Glass after scanning is completed gt Important Do not turn off the power while the machine is operating Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until scanning is completed Note The position or size of the original may not be scanned correctly depending on the type of original In this case refer to the on screen m
498. t Page 57 of 678 pages CEDIA Gilets Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly the print head nozzles FINE Cartridges are probably clogged Follow the procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern check the print head nozzle condition then clean the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory aligning the Print Head may improve print quality gt Important Do not rinse or wipe the FINE Cartridges This can cause trouble with the FINE Cartridges E8 Note Before performing maintenance Check if ink remains in the FINE Cartridge See Checking the Ink Status Check if the FINE Cartridges are installed correctly See Replacing Procedure Check if the orange protective tape on the bottom of the FINE Cartridge is removed See Replacing Procedure Ifthe Alarm lamp lights or flashes orange refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven After cleaning the Print Head print and examine the nozzle check pattern If there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the p
499. t change the extension jpg pdf etc when renaming a file You cannot move or copy images to the date folders displayed in tree view in My Box Scanned Imported Images or Recently Saved Images Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals View Use Window Page 398 of 678 pages EE Note A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set Thumbnails may appear as in the following cases Opening unsupported images File size is too large and there is not enough memory to display the image The file is corrupted When Images are Sorted by Categories Scanned images are displayed by category ES Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories In that case drag and drop an image and move it from one category to another e Category name Images N Selected n w Photo Images 3 Selected 1 w Portait Images 2 Selected 1 e Category name The following categories are provided Photos Portrait Others Documents Business Card Postcard Standard Size PDF File Others Custom categories Displays your custom categories Unclassified Displays images that have not yet been classified e Images N The number of images classified into the category is displayed e Selected n The number of images with the checkbox selected is displayed EA Note This portion is displayed only when one or more images are selected e Close All Op
500. t day as a holiday in your calendar E Note See Help for details on each dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Setting Calendar Display Page 217 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Calendar Display Yt S Easy PhotoPrint EX S Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display fonts lines colors position size etc Click Settings in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click E Setup Calendar to display the Calendar Settings dialog box P important The Position amp Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from the Edit screen Style for Yeer and Month Font Format Style for Days of Week Fort Note See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 218 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Opening Saved Files Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu Seber the kam you want to create from the many Select LOreey to access sa
501. t this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen It is recommended that you normally select this setting e Color Matching Select this to automatically match the scanner monitor and color printer colors thus reducing time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors Color Adjustment Buttons will be disabled This function is available when Color Mode is Color Source Scanner Select scanner profile Target Select target profile Monitor Select this to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor Defaults Returns to the default Color Matching settings e None Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear scanner driver E8 Note Color Matching is available when ScanGear scanner driver monitor color management compliant application such as Adobe Photoshop and printer are set up correctly Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor printer and application settings e Monitor Gamma By setting the gamma value of a monitor you can adjust the input data to the brightness characteristics of the monitor Adjust the value if your monitor s gamma value does not match the Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Settings Tab Page 521 of 678 pages default value set in ScanGear scanner driver and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value
502. tab of the Preferences dialog box e Document Size Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Settings Dialog Box Page 423 of 678 pages Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Custom Size Setting Wah B50 inches 1 00850 Hogt 11 09 inches 1 00 11 65 ures inch zj P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen e Scanning Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents s gt Resolution e Descreen Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen e Reduce Show through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show through in newspapers Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show through is apparent in the scanned image e Unsharp Ma
503. tal directions Va Save the image to the spectied folder as a PDF file Save as type PoF St Et Sirya Password securty settings You an save cach image as d POF fie IMG Drog he mage to rearrange the fias Ble name MG Swen CALs UserName Peires MP Navigator EX 2009_0 Browse F Save to a Sublolder wth Curert Date See cancel e Save as type Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images e PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file e PDF Multiple Pages Save multiple images in one PDF file E8 Note PDF Multiple Pages is displayed when multiple images are scanned e PDF Add Page Add the scanned images to a PDF file The images are added to the end of the PDF file You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added P important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 432 of 678 pages PDF Add Page cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine If a password protected PDF file is edited the passwords will be deleted Reset the passwords Setting Passwords for PDF Files e Set Make advanced settings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details
504. tandard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG e Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can adjust the effect level using the slider e Apply to all images Applies the correction to all images displayed in the thumbnail list e OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images e Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image e Save Selected Image Saves the corrected images selected e Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list e Exit Closes the Correct Enhance Images window Manual Tab Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast or to sharpen the entire image Use Correct Enhance to correct enhance specific areas See Correcting Enhancing Images Manually for details Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 409 of 678 pages Correct Enhance Images Window Page 410 of 678 pages Adjustment Cheni Uvertiame Pictures MP Navigator EX 2009 At 011003 jpg e Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image e Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast Move the s
505. tant When the application software specifies an input profile the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid 2 When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer Adobe RGB 1998 is not displayed You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the machine 7 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 8 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the color space of the selected image data Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method s gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity s gt Adjusting Contrast Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Color Balance Page 273 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color it changes the total color balance of the document Use the application software if you want to ch
506. te Print E sons D Edil Convert Jue to Man Meru CitvertUierhleme Pictures WO Navigator EX 2009 011 ANIMS INI jpg P important You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX E Note See Let s Try Scanning to scan images into MP Navigator EX You can also select images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer Creating Editing PDF Files with MP Navigator EX 1 Select images and click PDF ES Note You can select PDF JPEG TIFF and BMP files 2 Click Create Edit PDF file on the list P important For PDF files you can only edit those created with MP Navigator EX You cannot edit PDF files created with other applications PDF files edited in other applications cannot be edited as well Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Creating Editing PDF Files Page 360 of 678 pages If a password protected PDF file is selected you will be prompted to enter the password s gt Opening Editing Password protected PDF Files 3 Add delete pages as required To add an existing file click Add Page and select the file To delete a page select it and click Delete Selected Pages p Create Edit POF file Spray Rearange Pages i lt lt gt gt i C Urers UserhlamelDichares WO Navigatore DAID 0 ALUMS ONE jpg ES Note a You can add PDF JPEG TIFF and BMP files When adding a password protected PDF file you will be prompted to enter the pas
507. te Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Dialog Box Page 440 of 678 pages To reduce moire set Document Type to Magazine e Color Mode Select how to scan the document e Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the document size appears Select a Units then enter the Width and Height and click OK Custom Size Setting Wie 850 inches 1 008 50 11 09 inches 1 00 11 69 z P important When you select Auto Detect the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size In that case change the size to the actual document size A4 Letter etc and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the Platen e Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents gt Resolution e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear scanner driver screen and make advanced scan settings Color Mode Document Size Resolution and other settings in the Custom dialog box will be disabled Specify these settings in the ScanGear scanner driver screen e Specify Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings e Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them The Fi
508. ted paper If it is smudged with ink perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning again If the problem is not resolved after performing the Bottom Plate Cleaning twice the protrusions inside the machine may be stained See Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine to clean them Note When performing the Bottom Plate Cleaning again make sure to use a new piece of paper O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Page 76 of 678 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine gt Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine m Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Caution Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine If the protrusions inside the machine are stained wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Appendix Page 77 of 678 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Appendix Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Machine A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Page 78 of 678 pages Basic Guide Adk E Contents gt Appendix gt Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of
509. the Black point and White point Sliders Move the Black point Slider or White point Slider to adjust brightness Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Black point Slider toward the highlight side Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the White point Slider toward the shadow side ka gt Images with widely distributed data Move the Black point Slider toward the highlight side and White point Slider toward the shadow side Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Histogram Page 481 of 678 pages Moving the Mid point Slider Move the Mid point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Mid point Slider toward the highlight side Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the Mid point Slider toward the shadow side has gt amry Adjusting Histograms Using the Droppers When you select a Channel and click the Black point Mid point or White point Dropper the mouse pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to change the setting a a gjo Al 25s Gray Balance The point clicked with Z Black point Dropper will be the darkest point You can also enter a value 0 to 245 The point clicked with Z Mid point Dropper will be the middle of the tonal range
510. the Scanning Unit Cover and install the appropriate FINE Cartridge If the error is not resolved contact the service center Make sure that each FINE Cartridge is installed in the correct position Routine Maintenance Press the machine s Black or Color button to continue printing Contact the service center e Check the device connected to the machine Printing photos directly is possible only with a PictBridge compliant device e A communication time out occurs if an operation takes too long or if it takes too much time to send data This may cancel printing In such cases disconnect and reconnect the USB cable When printing from a PictBridge compliant device depending on the model or brand of your device you may have to select a PictBridge compliant print mode on the An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED ETRS Ink level cannot be detected E 1 4 The FINE Cartridge cannot be recognized E 1 5 The FINE Cartridge cannot be recognized E 1 6 Ink has run out le 1 8 PictBridge compliant device MP270 series is connected via a USB only hub Exon The size of the original cannot be correctly detected or the document is too small when the Fit to Page copying is selected E 3 1 The machine is not connected with the computer E 5 0 Scanning the print head alignment sheet has failed Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 573 of 678 pages device before connecting it to the machine You ma
511. the image data effectively None The printer driver does not perform color correction Select this value when you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for special Canon paper in an application software to print data 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified color correction method P important When ICM is disabled in the application software ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable Related Topics s gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Page 266 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor To get the print results as close as possible to the
512. the image to e mal Mal Pogan None Attach Manusly V Adjust attachment fle sire Sze Medium fts in a 800 by 660 window Save in C Users UserNtame Pictures MP Navigator EX Mal_200801 01 Browse Sie rane ING SH E8 Note a You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e mail Click Set to open a dialog box and select a compression type from High Low Compression Standard or Low High Compression 4 Click OK Files are saved according to the settings and the e mail software program starts 5 Specify the recipient enter the subject and message then send e mail For details refer to the manual of the e mail software program Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 367 of 678 pages Editing Files Page 368 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX gt Editing Files Editing Files You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine After scanning documents and saving them open the View amp Use window to select what you want to do with the images v Photo eaa Selected 3 v Oters Imager Gekctet Q Others lt j x EN lores v Doumer mogt b BuresnCad inagpa0 H Selections Jumo to Man Mere C E CAllvers verhlame Pictures Navigator EX 2009 01 M
513. the list click Pause Printer or Stop Jobs O A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 29 of 678 pages Basic Guide a E Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX m Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX This section introduces a few of the useful functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Creating Your Own Prints You can create an album or calendar using your photos Nye Album Calendar Layout Print Stickers Correcting Images You can use Red Eye Correction Face Sharpener Digital Face Smoothing Brightness Contrast etc to adjust correct or enhance images automatically or manually Brightness 90 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Documents Windows Page 30 of 678 pages stile Gules Advanced C Contents gt Printing from Your Computer gt Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Windows This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide E8 Note Operations may vary depending on your software application For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application The screens used in th
514. the queue are canceled Reprint if necessary EA Note When reloading the paper confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it correctly Loading Paper Originals A5 sized paper is suited to printing documents consisting mainly of text We do not recommend using such paper to print documents with photos or graphics since the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals In Other Cases Page 609 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt In Other Cases In Other Cases Make sure of the following e Check 1 Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot e Check 2 Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the machine unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object e Check 3 Is the paper curled Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 610 of 678 pages Velieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Numbe
515. the scan save and e mail software program settings Mail Dialog Box e OCR Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad included with Windows When you click this icon the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save settings OCR Dialog Box EA Note For further procedures refer to the application s manual e Custom Scan documents and open them in a specified application Document type is automatically detected Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Custom Scan with One click Tab Page 382 of 678 pages When you click this icon the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan save and application settings Custom Dialog Box Note For further procedures refer to the application s manual Start scanning by clicking the button Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately gt Switch Mode Switches to One click Mode The One click Mode screen appears s gt One click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup If this checkbox is not selected the last used screen appears t Preferences Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens In the Preferences dialog box you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions Preferences Dialog Box leuia Opens this guide P important The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type
516. the size to the size of the paper set in the machine Note Selectable paper sizes depend on the selected printer e Media Type Select the type of paper for printing Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type Note Selectable paper types depend on the selected printer e Print Quality Select the print quality e Density Click p Density adjustment to select the print density e Copies Click Copy setting to select the number of copies to be printed e Grayscale Printing Select this checkbox to print the document in black and white e Preview before printing Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing e Defaults Restores the default settings e Print Start printing with the specified settings Note To cancel while spooling click Cancel To cancel while printing click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status To open a confirmation window for the printer status click printer icon on the taskbar Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Print Photo Dialog Box Page 405 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Print Photo Dialog Box Print Photo Dialog Box Click Print in the View amp Use window then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box P important The Print Photo dialog box will not
517. ti OSN Easy PhotoPrint EX ng 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Check sticker print settings Cick the Pring button to pring wth the current settings Printing starts Canon wox Copies Paper Sue Photo Stickers Pagar Source Meda Type Glossy Photo Paper Pring Qatiy Duplex Prntrig F Borderless Preting Print Postion Advanxed 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Med Cop ia Type ies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box To display the Adjust Print Position dialog box click Print Position You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print E8 Note See Downloade Help for details on the Print Settings screen d from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 143 of 678 pages Page top Downloade
518. ting Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head m Cleaning the Print Head Clean the Print Head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition Cleaning the Print Head consumes ink so clean the Print Head only when necessary 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Clean the Print Head 1 Press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until H appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The machine starts cleaning the Print Head Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 1 to 2 minutes 3 Check the print head condition When the cleaning is completed the LED returns to the copy standby mode To check the print head condition print the nozzle check pattern See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern E9 Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice clean the Print Head deeply See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply 90 A Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 62 of 678 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head Deeply m Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Pr
519. ting Page 126 of 678 pages 3 Click Print ES Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Calendars Page 127 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Changing Layout s gt Changing Background s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays s gt Saving s gt Opening Saved Files Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Calendars Page 128 of 678 pages Questions and Answers How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 129 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Starting
520. tings Dialog Box Check 4 In MP Navigator EX deselect the Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again s gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Page 628 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Check 1 Exit other applications and try again Check 2 Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again gt Resolution Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Page 629 of 678 pages Nelifielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Check 1 Restart the computer reduce the output resolution in ScanGear scanner driver and scan again Check 2 Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space then scan again Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save when the image size is too large such as when scanning a large document at high resolution Check 3 For Location of Temporary Files in MP Navigator EX specify a folder on a drive with sufficient free space General Tab Check 4 Multiple de
521. tion Color Balance Saturation 0 a tow High n a o Color Batance 1 0 Cyan Red Magenta a a m w 0 Yelow Sue E8 Note a Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Saturation Adjust the image s saturation vividness You can brighten colors that have faded with time etc Move ai slider under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation darken the image and to the right to increase the saturation brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Sahration tow High Saturation decreased Original image Saturation increased E Note The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much Color Balance Adjust images that have a colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Page 476 of 678 pages Move ai Slider under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color Cyan amp Red Magenta amp Green Yellow amp Blue These are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair It is
522. tion starts after images are scanned P important Depending on the specified application the images may not appear correctly or the application may not start Reset Cancels the application setting Set Allows you to select an application to start Start scanning by clicking the one click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults Scan Scans and saves documents as PDF files with the specified settings Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 430 of 678 pages Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 431 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt MP Navigator EX Screens gt Save as PDF file Dialog Box MP Navigator EX Save as PDF file Dialog Box The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One click tab or from PDF in the One click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image In the Save as PDF file dialog box you can make settings for saving images to a computer P important a You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizon
523. tion will be used for optimized printing This section describes the print settings on a PictBridge compliant device When operating the device be sure to follow the instructions given in the device s instruction manual Paper size 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 5 x 7 1 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm A4 8 5 x 11 Letter 4 x 7 1 10 1 x 18 cm 2 1 Can be selected only on certain Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices May not be selected depending on the device 2 Hi Vision may appear on a non Canon brand PictBridge compliant device Paper type e Default Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 e Photo Photo Paper Plus Glossy I PP 201 Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 e Fast Photo Photo Paper Pro II PR 201 e Plain A4 Letter When Paper type is set to Plain borderless printing will be disabled even when Layout is set to Borderless Layout Default Borderless Index Bordered Borderless 4 up Layout compatible with A4 Letter sized paper Print date amp Default Off No printing Date File No Both Off file no Image Default 1 On Exif Print Off Face 2 Red Eye 2 optimize 1 Photos are optimized for printing using the Photo optimizer pro function 2 Can be selected only on certain Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices May not be selected depending on the device Trimming Default Off No trimming On follow the camera s sett
524. tiple photo layout in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you wari lo part Check the Preview and chek the Print button Pity Printing starts Exif Print E Buah Note See the following section for details on how to select photos gt Selecting a Photo The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type Photos are arranged in the following order Example Borderless x4 1 3 2 4 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click ot Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing an Index Page 188 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing an Index eS Easy PhotoPrint EX lt Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page It is convenient for managing your photos To print an index select Index from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you wart lo pent Check the Prenew aed cick the Print button ont Printing starts Exif Print EEEF Piaf Bordetess Bordered h Pa aA Oo
525. to R Saven Ciper UserName Pituren MP Navigate Browse F Sawe to a Subfoider wth Cument Date D Qpen the save dalog box after scanning te mage EA Note See the section below for details s gt Scanner Button Settings Tab Save 4 Click OK The operation will be performed according to the settings when you press the SCAN button on the machine Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 319 of 678 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanning with the Bundled Application Software What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software s gt Let s Try Scanning Useful MP Navigator EX Functions s Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX Screens Appendix Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software Page 320 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software What Is MP Navigator EX Supplied Scanner Software MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents It is suitable even for beginners P important a MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine In that
526. to Scanning text documents Color Document Black and White Document or Text OCR Scanning magazines Magazine Color P important You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected e Specify Specify the document size resolution and other advanced scan settings Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Photos Documents Platen Screen Scan Import Window Page 384 of 678 pages gt Scan Settings Dialog Box Photos Documents P important Specify is not available if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected e Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox when you want to scan with ScanGear scanner driver Use ScanGear scanner driver to correct images and adjust colors when scanning e Scan Scanning starts E8 Note This button changes to Open Scanner Driver when you select the Use the scanner driver checkbox e Open Scanner Driver ScanGear scanner driver starts See ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens for details on ScanGear scanner driver screens ES Note This button changes to Scan when you deselect the Use the scanner driver checkbox e Clear Delete all images in the Thumbnail window EA Note Images not saved on a computer will be deleted To keep important images use Save or other methods to save them to a computer before clicking Clear e Save Save the selected images Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings gt S
527. to Professional Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen Images cannot be corrected enhanced Image display order cannot be changed Edited images cannot be saved Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Therefore you cannot use the Vivid Photo and Photo Noise Reduction functions The Album function is available with the following applications e MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later e ZoomBrowser EX Ver 5 8 or later Supported Image File Formats Extensions e BMP omp JPEG jpg jpeg e TIFF tif tiff PICT pict pct Easy PhotoPrint image files epp P important When selecting an image if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder the image may not be displayed correctly or Easy PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format In such cases move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different file format and then select the folder again Note The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as Question Mark When Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional all image files supported by Digital Photo Professional will be displayed File Formats Extensions Supported by Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint
528. to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 294 of 678 pages Velieirlecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows ES Note This guide mainly describes operations on the Windows Vista Operations may differ depending on versions of the Windows Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer driver setup window appears ES Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure printing profile that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown
529. tos gt Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again s gt Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 149 of 678 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Printing Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Print imapas in the selected byot Cick the Pring button to print wth the current settings Printing starts Printer Canon wo J Copies Paper Sre 4x6 10x1Sem Pager Source Rear Tray Meca Type Photo Paper Ps Gosi Print Guaity Standard Qua sky Settings T Dordertess Preting 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to
530. tput Tray 4 Disconnect the printer cable from the computer and from the machine and then disconnect the power plug from the machine 5 Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the machine to keep them from opening during transportation Then pack the machine in the plastic bag 6 Attach the protective material to the machine when packing the machine P important Pack the machine with the FINE Cartridges left installed in the machine E8 Note Clearly label the box as FRAGILE or HANDLE WITH CARE Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Page 663 of 678 pages Nelieiejecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer properties dialog box opens E9 Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there m
531. tridge immediately after the printing The resulting print quality is not satisfactory if printing is continued under the ink out condition If a PictBridge compliant device is connected via a USB hub remove the hub and connect it directly to the machine e Make sure that the original meets the requirements and is correctly loaded on the Platen Glass e Check the position and direction of the original loaded on the Platen Glass Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable Press the Stop Reset button to dismiss the error then take the actions described below An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED Page 574 of 678 pages Make sure that the print head alignment sheet is set in the correct position and orientation on the Platen Glass Make sure the Platen Glass and the print head alignment sheet are not dirty Make sure the type and size of loaded paper is suitable for Automatic Print Head Alignment For Automatic Print Head Alignment always load one sheet of A4 or letter sized plain paper Make sure if Print Head nozzles are clogged Print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the Print Head Routine Maintenance If the error is not resolved connect the machine to the computer and align the Print Head on the printer driver Aligning the Print Head Position Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately When the Power and Alarm lamps flash alternately as shown below
532. tridge runs out of ink replace it with a new one e Check 5 When using paper with one printable surface make sure that the paper is loaded with the printable side facing up Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side e Check 6 Is the Platen Glass dirty Clean the Platen Glass Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover e When copying see also the sections below e Check 7 Make sure that the original is properly loaded on the Platen Glass Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 586 of 678 pages gt Loading Paper Originals e Check 8 Is the original loaded with the side to be copied facing down on the Platen Glass e Check 9 Did you copy a printout done by this machine For MP270 series only print from the digital camera directly or reprint from the computer For MP250 series only reprint from the computer If you copy a printout done by this machine print quality may be reduced Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Colors Are Unclear Page 587 of 678 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Colors Are Unclear Colors Are Unclear e Check 1 Enable color correction When
533. ttings for creating PDF files See PDF Settings Dialog Box for details e Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder click Browse to specify another one The following folders are specified by default Windows Vista MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000 MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder e Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it A subfolder with a name such as 2009_01_01 Year_Month_Date will be created If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in e Start scanning by clicking the one click button Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Auto Scan Dialog Box Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon Apply Saves and applies the specified settings Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings Cancel Cancels the specified settings The current screen closes Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings When Save as type is Auto a confirmation appears Click Open Manual to open this guide if it is installed Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 417 of 678
534. tup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified background P important When Borderless is selected the Stamp Background button appears grayed out and is unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Stamp Background Printing function of Booklet Printing Related Topics gt Registering a Stamp gt Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 247 of 678 pages Page top Registering a Stamp Page 248 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering a Stamp Registering a Stamp This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used You can create and register a new stamp You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows Registering a New Stamp 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab iiih L Canca MP2 Printing Preferences Qk Setup E Man SB Page Setup of Efect A Martenance El Page Sze Letter 35x117 amp Onerestion a Porat A ungego
535. ty may deteriorate or the sheet may be stained at the top and bottom depending on the type of the media used When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media used In this case crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size Note When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab borderless printing is not recommended and therefore the dialog box for media selection appears When you are using plain paper for test printing select Plain Paper and click OK Expanding the Range of the Document to Print Specifying a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems However the portion of the document that extends off the paper range will not be printed Subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed Try borderless printing once If you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing reduce the amount of extension The extension amount becomes shorter as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left P important When the amount of extension is shortened an unexpected margin may be produced on the print depending on the size of the paper Note When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position image data will be printed in the full size When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab you can confirm bef
536. uced Check Set the printing size in the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor Page 634 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems gt Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor Check 1 Change the display setting in the application You cannot reduce the display size in Paint To reduce the display size open the images in an application For details refer to the application s manual If you have any questions contact the manufacturer of the application Check 2 Change the resolution setting in ScanGear scanner driver and scan again The higher the resolution the larger the resulting image will be gt Resolution Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanned Image Does Not Open Page 635 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems gt Scanned Image Does Not Open Scanned Image Does Not Open Check If the file format is not supported by the application scan the image again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG For details refer to the application s manual If you have any questions contact the manufacturer of the application Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals MP Navigator EX Problem
537. uces the least noticeable vertical white streaks FENN MHANN A B A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks If it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks A Less noticeable horizontal white streaks B More noticeable horizontal white streaks 9 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The second pattern is printed P important Do not open the Scanning Unit Cover while printing is in progress 10 Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 554 of 678 pages Aligning the Print Head Position 11 12 t x a oes re o M o l O os D e GE oe M O o ee o gt Se o ee o ee o ee ee a DS se os a o or M o U a l M G M a ks c o m o M Gl lt es IM 2 o a O es e ee o o JE o a a o a o UM a e M a N o M l M lt 5 M o M l o ol When you have entered all the necessary values click OK ES Note m f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks FENNI DEEANN A B A Less noticea
538. ucing the cast color and increasing the complementary color Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 474 of 678 pages It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust the colors so that the portion turns white Preview image appears in the center Preview image colors change as you adjust them Color Adjustment Yellow Below is an example of correcting a bluish image Since Blue and Green are too strong click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct ES Note Color adjustments are applied only to the scan area cropping frame or the frame selected in thumbnail view You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern screen You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image Increase the magenta to adda warm tint and increase the blue to add a cool tint Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Page 475 of 678 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance In ScanGear s Advanced Mode tab click O Satura
539. ugh reduction function In that case use preview first 5 Set Output Settings Output Settings 6 Adjust the cropping frame scan area correct image and adjust colors as required gt Adjusting Cropping Frames gt Image Settings b Color Adjustment Buttons 7 Click Scan Scanning starts Note Click rT Information to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings document type etc ScanGear s response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box gt Scan Tab Related Topic Advanced Mode Tab Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Page 461 of 678 pages Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 462 of 678 pages Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 463 of 678 pages Adios Giitels Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear Scanner Driver gt Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning in Auto Scan Mode You can scan easily in Auto Scan Mode of ScanGear scanner driver by letting it automatically determine the type of document placed on the Platen ES Note Supported document types are photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers text documents and CD DVD To scan other documents specify the document type on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode t
540. uide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Swapping Positions of Photos ji tS S DY Easy PhotoPrint EX gie lt P Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images Ce Click Swap Image Positions in the Edit screen Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Sead costars of two mages N Te um Select target aod source mugen Ga swap Posters Re Ml Vy 7 Tarot Edit Tools BAe aHan aaee we Select the target and source images you want to swap then click Swap When you finish swapping all images you want to swap click Back to Edit Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Replacing Photos Page 204 of 678 pages Adna tiffs Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Replacing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen then click Replace Selected Image K 50000_sJ00 Bec Or Ya MONON sina MEAN siaa Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the Replace Image dialog box Select the image you want to replac
541. uld be scanned at a resolution that corresponds to the resolution of the printer For example if you want to print using a 600 dpi black and white printer you should set the resolution to 600 dpi With a color printer specifying the resolution at half the resolution of the printer should be fine For example if you want to print scanned paper photos using a 600 dpi color printer you should set the resolution to 300 dpi However with a high resolution printer printing takes longer than usual if you set the resolution to half the resolution of the printer Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale If you print a document at twice the size both vertically and horizontally the resolution of the document will be reduced by half If the resolution of the original document is 300 dpi the resolution of the enlarged document will be 150 dpi If you print the document with a 600 dpi color printer the lack of detail in the image may be obvious In that case if you scan at the Scanning Resolution of 600 dpi the resolution will be 300 dpi even if you double the size of document and you can print the document with sufficient quality Conversely if you print a document at half scale it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution When Printing Color Photos at Twice the Size Document resolution 300 Print at twice the size Printing resolution 300 dpi Scanning resolution actual scanning dpi Scanning resolution 600 r
542. unsatisfactory adjust the print head position E8 Note If the remaining ink level is low the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low See Replacing a FINE Cartridge You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper Be sure to use paper that is white and clean on both sides 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the print head alignment sheet 1 Press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until u lowercase u appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The print head alignment sheet will be printed gt Important Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet Be careful not to get the print head alignment sheet dirty If the sheet is stained or wrinkled it may not be scanned properly Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Aligning the Print Head Page 64 of 678 pages S ye I tHALUUUUUU tHAUIANATY T E E DAUANT UU 5 Scan the print head alignment sheet to adjust the print head position 1 Load the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass Load the print head alignment sheet WITH THE PRINTED SIDE FACING DOWN and align the mark PW onthe upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark y 2 Close the Do
543. up window It also provides you with the information on how to take an action when you have trouble with the operation My Printer is not available in Macintosh Windows Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Useful Software Applications Page 40 of 678 pages Double click My Printer on the desktop dine se sa be tha me ew doe i a ies ee rr ee DE Das in tas mai nm Pdr a ES Note You can also start My Printer from Solution Menu or the taskbar Install My Printer from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install My Printer select My Printer in Custom Install To start My Printer from the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Canon Utilities My Printer then My Printer m Easy WebPrint EX Easy WebPrint EX provides quick and easy printing of web pages for Internet Explorer You can print web pages automatically resized to fit the paper width without cutting off the sides of pages or preview and select the desired web pages to print Easy WebPrint EX is not available in Windows 2000 and Macintosh gt Important It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the copyright holder except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright Additionally reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on portrait rights When Easy WebPri
544. urn the LED to the copy standby mode 9 Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Page 74 of 678 pages Basic Guide Advanced C E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Machine gt Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning m Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Remove stains from the inside of the machine If the inside of the machine becomes dirty printed paper may get dirty so we recommend performing cleaning regularly gt Important Do not perform any other operations while performing the Bottom Plate Cleaning You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and remove any paper from the Rear Tray 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and open the Output Tray Extension 3 Folda single sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in half widthwise and unfold the paper 4 Load only this sheet of paper in the Rear Tray with the open side facing you 5 Clean the inside of the machine 1 Press the i Maintenance button repeatedly until J appears 2 Press the Black or Color button The paper cleans the inside of the machine as it feeds through the machine Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Page 75 of 678 pages Check the folded area of the ejec
545. vanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Color Adjustment Buttons ScanGear Color Adjustment Buttons Base Mode Advanced Mode aumo Scan Mode Favorite Settings Input Settings Select Source 1 Pacer Sre Coler Made 5 30 Ove Site 4 4 4 0 aj ejej ewan Gm The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones You can adjust the image s overall brightness or contrast and adjust its highlight and shadow values histogram or balance tone curve P important The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Note Selectable settings depend on color mode settings When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons the results will be reflected in the preview image Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items e OG Saturation Color Balance Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image Use this function to brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance ee Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image If the image is too dark or too bright or if the imag
546. vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print Downloade d from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 136 of 678 pages EE Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Stickers Page 137 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos m Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving gt Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter
547. ve Works of Art Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Start Easy PhotoPrint EX 7 Click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing with the Bundled Application Software Create a Personalized Photo Album Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy PhotoPrint EX All you need to do is select which photos to use select a layout then load paper into your printer and print After you bind the printed sheets you ll have the one and only album of your memories You can change the layout and background and attach comments to photos You can arrange a photo across the left and right pages You can also select the size and orientation CHECK sedesewsssnccas Select a theme background design to create a single themed album Decorate Items with Text and Frames You can add text and frames to photos Attach a description of the photo in an album and add a frame to enhance the photo s atmosphere Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 673 of 678 pages eH HH H A l U M M U r CHECK Select Album to add text and frames You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars ea
548. ved Roms gt amp Photo Print amp COR wA Stickers The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX by icon view only for Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Edit screen appears ES Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats extensions Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file el4 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 3 Edit the file if necessary EA Note See the following sections for details on the editing procedures Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Opening Saved Files Page 219 of 678 pages Editing Album Editing Calendar Editing Stickers s gt Editing Layout Print EA Note You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Double click or click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing with Other Application Software Page 220 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide g
549. vices may be connected to USB ports Disconnect other devices Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Page 630 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Problems with Scanning gt Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Check Disconnect the machine from the computer then uninstall and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX e Step 1 Uninstall the MP Drivers See Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers for details e Step 2 Uninstall MP Navigator EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt MP Navigator EX 3 0 gt MP Navigator EX Uninstall 2 When a confirmation appears click Yes 3 When uninstallation is complete click OK MP Navigator EX is uninstalled e Step 3 Reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX Insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then select Custom Install and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Software Problems Page 631 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Software Problems Software Problems E mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Software Program gt Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged Reduced s gt Scanned Image Is Enlarged
550. viewing e Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after previewing e None Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Preview Tab Page 518 of 678 pages No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing e Cropping Size for Thumbnail View Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents Standard is selected by default e Larger Displays 105 in width and height of the area displayed for the standard size e Standard The standard size e Smaller Displays 95 in width and height of the area displayed for the standard size Note When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting the preview images will be refreshed and cropped to the new size As the preview images are refreshed the color adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scan Tab Page 519 of 678 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Scanning gt Scanning with Other Application Software gt ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens gt Scan Tab Scan Tab On the Scan tab you can specify the following settings Scanner Preven Sen Color Settings Status of ScanGear dalog after scanning D Close StanGesr automaticaly Do not close ScanGear automatically D Desplay the dalog to select next action e Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning S
551. w the procedure described below to correct the paper curl A 1 Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 592 of 678 pages 4 a 7 2 Check that the paper is now flat We recommend printing curl corrected paper one sheet at a time ES Note Depending on the media type the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward In such cases follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0 1 inch 3 mm B in height before printing This may improve the print result C C Printing side We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time e Check 4 If you are printing on thick paper select the Prevent paper abrasion setting Selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting will widen the clearance between the Print Head and the loaded paper If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded paper set the machine to prevent paper abrasion by using the Operation Panel or the printer driver Print speed is reduced if you are selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting Deactivate the Prevent paper abrasion setting once printing is complete If not this setting remains enabled for all subsequent print jobs e To set by using the Operation Panel Press the Maintenance button
552. w will not be corrected e Low Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting e Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting e High Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting P important Do not place items that weigh 4 4 Ibs 2 0 kg or more on the Platen Also do not press on the document with a force exceeding 4 4 lbs 2 0 kg If you press heavily the scanner may not work correctly or you might break the glass Align the document with the edge of the Platen If not the shadow will not be corrected properly Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document If the page background is not white shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all While scanning press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview the scan If the binding part is not even the shadow will not be corrected properly i How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned Note Cover the document with black cloth if white spots streaks or colored patterns appear in scan results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen If the shadow is not corrected properly adjust the cropping frame on the preview image Adjusting Cropping Frames Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Color Adjustment Buttons Page 509 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Ad
553. with the modified settings hereafter Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Troubleshooting Page 568 of 678 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs gt The Machine Cannot Be Powered On s gt An Error Code Is Displayed on the LED LED Cannot Be Seen At All Cannot Install the MP Drivers gt Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Print Results Not Satisfactory s gt Printing Does Not Start Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed m Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Jams Message Appears on the Computer Screen gt For Windows Users Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device MP270 series only s gt Problems with Scanning s gt Software Problems MP Navigator EX Problems If You Cannot Resolve the Problem FAQs s Instructions for Use Printer Driver s gt General Notes Scanner Driver Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals If an Error Occurs Page 569 of 678 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If an Error Occurs If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically Take the appropri
554. x 148 0 mm Hagaki 2 7 87 x 5 83 inches 200 0 x 148 0 mm Comm Env 10 4 12 x 9 50 inches 104 6 x 241 3 mm DL Env 4 33 x 8 66 inches 110 0 x 220 0 mm Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Media Types You Can Use Page 51 of 678 pages Choukei 3 4 72 x 9 25 inches 120 0 x 235 0 mm Choukei 4 3 54 x 8 07 inches 90 0 x 205 0 mm Youkei 4 4 13 x 9 25 inches 105 0 x 235 0 mm Youkei 6 3 86 x 7 48 inches 98 0 x 190 0 mm Card 2 16 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Wide 4 00 x 7 10 inches 101 6 x 180 6 mm Non standard sizes You can also specify a custom size within the following range Minimum size 2 17 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Maximum size 8 50 x 26 61 inches 215 9 x 676 0 mm Paper Weight 17 to 28 Ib 64 to 105 g m2 except for Canon genuine paper Do not use heavier or lighter paper except for Canon genuine paper as it could jam in the machine Notes on Storing Paper Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package just before printing To avoid curling when you do not print put unused paper back into the package and keep it ona level surface And also store it avoiding heat humidity and direct sunlight Notes on Paper for Full page Borderless Printing You cannot use A5 B5 and Legal sized paper and envelopes for full page borderless printing You can use plain paper for full page borderless printing only when printing fro
555. xt of the image you want to search for then click Kl Search button For Exif information text in Maker Model Description and User Comment is searched Advanced Search Click Search on the left of the screen to open search options Enter information of the image you want to search for then click Start Search Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Searching Images Search in My Box Scznned Imported Images File Name A word or phiase in the fle L Calegoy Unclassified w Modilied Date w C Shooting Date V 1 2005 aS UU w More Advanced Options A weed of pease in the file Exif information PDF text C Case sensitive Match all ciiteria Match ary csitetia Start Search o e Search in If you know where to look for select the drive folder or network from Specify Folder e File Name If you know the file name enter it e A word or phrase in the file Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options P important Page 349 of 678 pages For PDF files you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX You cannot search PDF files created or edited in other applications Also searching PDF files is available only when keyword search is set For details of creating PDF files that enables keyword search see PDF Settings Dialog Box Password protected PDF files cannot be searched e Category You can se
556. y also have to turn on your device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the machine Perform necessary operations before connecting your device referring to its instruction manual If the error is still not resolved check if you can print another photograph Ink may have run out The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled since the ink level cannot be correctly detected If you want to continue printing without this function press the machine s Stop Reset button for at least 5 seconds Canon recommends to use new genuine Canon cartridges in order to obtain optimum qualities Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition The FINE Cartridge may not be compatible with this machine Install the appropriate FINE Cartridge s gt Routine Maintenance The FINE Cartridge may not be installed properly Open the Scanning Unit Cover and install the FINE Cartridge properly Routine Maintenance Ink has run out Replace the ink cartridge and close the Scanning Unit Cover If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing press the machine s Stop Reset button for at least 5 seconds with the ink cartridge installed Then printing can continue under the ink out condition The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled Replace the empty ink car
557. you want to edit it again s gt Saving E Note Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Editing Page 134 of 678 pages See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Printing Page 135 of 678 pages Adans gida Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Printing Printi 1 Clic The ng k Print Settings Print Settings screen appears 2 Set Check calendar pent settings Cick the Print button to pring wth the current settings Printing starts Preter Canon Copies Paper Sua Ad Paper Source Meda Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Pring Quality Duplex Printing T Borderiess Preting the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Med Cop ia Type ies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may
558. ze is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Fit to Page Printing Page 232 of 678 pages Page lroa FetoPage lt E 8 E m El Duplex Preting Sacie Sde Copes 1 o tity yi El Port tom Last Page O Calate Part Options Stamp Backgeund E re 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size Page top Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals Scaled Printing Page 233 of 678 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Scaled Printing Scaled Printing The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab E Page Sze tess ooo o amp Otton A Pora A ungego J Retme 100 degoes o E Portar Poer Sze Later 85x11 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods e Select a Printer Paper Size

Canon PIXMA MP272 User Guide Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents